FPIA3000 User Manual English August 2006

Flow Particle Image Analyzer
FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S
Operators Manual
CHAPTER 1: FOR YOUR SAFETY
CHAPTER 2: EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 3: PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING
CHAPTER 4: TESTING
CHAPTER 5: RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING
CHAPTER 6: QUALITY CONTROL
CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER 8: SOP SETTINGS
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 10 ANALYSIS PARAMETERS
CHAPTER 11 DISPLAY SETUP
CHAPTER 12 PRINT FORMAT
CHAPTER 13 USER AUTHENTICATION
CHAPTER 14 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
CHAPTER 15 MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 16 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
APPENDIX A. INSTALLATION
APPENDIX B. SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S
APPENDIX C. TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS
APPENDIX D. OUTPUT FORMAT
APPENDIX E. GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S
RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS
APPENDIX F. FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE
APPENDIX G. ULTRASONIC DISPERSION UNIT MANUAL (OPTIONAL)
APPENDIX H. HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION)
APPENDIX I. PART11 SOFTWARE MANUAL (OPTIONAL)
APPENDIX J. FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL
SYSMEX CORPORATION
KOBE, JAPAN
Copyright
2004-2006 by SYSMEX CORPORATION

All rights reserved. No part of this Operators Manual may be Code No. 461-2139-2
reproduced in any form or by any means whatsoever without PRINTED IN JAPAN
prior written permission of SYSMEX CORPORATION. Date of Last Revision: August 2006
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operators Manual -- Revised December 2005
Sysmex is a registered trademark of Sysmex Corporation.
PARTICLE SHEATH is a registered trademark of Sysmex Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
All other company names and product names contained in this document may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of the respective owners.
This document may not be copied or published in part or in its entirety without permission.
Some of the screens that appear in this document may be different from what you may
actually see on your screen.
Because of ongoing improvements made to the product, some of the descriptions contained
in this document may not apply to the specific product you are using.
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 I
Table of contents
Chapter 1 FOR YOUR SAFETY
1. How to use this product safely.....................................................................1-1
1.1 Explanation of labeling...........................................................................1-1
2. Introduction ..................................................................................................1-5
3. Signs............................................................................................................1-6
4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ..........................................................1-7
Chapter 2 EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONS
1. Overview of the device.................................................................................2-1
2. System configuration ...................................................................................2-2
3. Overview of screen displays and switches ..................................................2-3
3.1 Names of components of the testing unit ..............................................2-3
3.2 Screen display of the data processing unit ............................................2-4
4. Emergency stop...........................................................................................2-6
5. Types of alarms ...........................................................................................2-6
6. Packaging ....................................................................................................2-7
7. Installation....................................................................................................2-7
7.1 Installing and moving the instrument .....................................................2-7
7.2 Installation location ................................................................................2-7
7.3 Grounding..............................................................................................2-8
8. Reagents......................................................................................................2-8
9. Names and functions of the components of the FPIA-3000/3000S...........2-11
9.1 Front panel/right front panel.................................................................2-11
9.2 Rear side of the testing unit .................................................................2-13
9.3 Pneumatic unit .....................................................................................2-15
10. Disposal ...................................................................................................2-17
Chapter 3 PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING
1. Items to be checked before turning on the device .......................................3-1
1.1 Reagents ...............................................................................................3-1
1.2 Printer paper (when connected to a printer) ..........................................3-1
1.3 Instrument inspection.............................................................................3-1
2. Turning on the device ..................................................................................3-2
3. Starting the analysis program and background check.................................3-3
3.1 Starting the analysis program................................................................3-3
3.2 Sheath liquid replacement .....................................................................3-5
3.3 Background Check ................................................................................3-7
3.4 Auto Focusing........................................................................................3-9
Chapter 4 TESTING
1. Test flow.......................................................................................................4-1
2. Check instrument status ..............................................................................4-2
3. Test information setting................................................................................4-4
II Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
3.1 Sample information setting.................................................................... 4-4
3.2 SOP setting........................................................................................... 4-5
3.3 Measurement condition settings ........................................................... 4-6
3.4 Analysis conditions................................................................................ 4-8
3.5 Setting instrument conditions................................................................ 4-9
4. Test procedure .......................................................................................... 4-11
4.1 Preparing a sample............................................................................. 4-11
4.2 Testing a sample................................................................................. 4-12
5. Display of analysis results ......................................................................... 4-14
6. Shutting down (turning off the power) ....................................................... 4-15
Chapter 5 RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING
1. Record Display and Processing .................................................................. 5-1
1.1 Processing the record list ...................................................................... 5-1
1.2 Screen composition............................................................................... 5-1
1.3 Explanation of functions........................................................................ 5-2
1.4 Sort functions ........................................................................................ 5-7
1.5 The filter function................................................................................... 5-9
1.6 Search functions ................................................................................. 5-11
1.7 Display reset ....................................................................................... 5-13
1.8 Sample information revision................................................................ 5-14
1.9 Reanalyze ........................................................................................... 5-15
1.10 Deletion............................................................................................. 5-16
1.11 Merging records ................................................................................ 5-16
1.12 Copying to the clipboard ................................................................... 5-17
1.13 Changing the record display ............................................................. 5-17
2. Processing analysis results ....................................................................... 5-18
2.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-18
2.2 Screen composition............................................................................. 5-18
2.3 Moving records.................................................................................... 5-20
2.4 Thumbnail image display .................................................................... 5-21
2.5 Reanalyze ........................................................................................... 5-22
2.6 Selection particle save ........................................................................ 5-34
2.7 Changing the display of the Analysis results screen........................... 5-34
3. Particle image list ...................................................................................... 5-35
3.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-35
3.3 Copying to the clipboard ..................................................................... 5-36
3.4 Detailed information display................................................................ 5-37
4. Frequency tables....................................................................................... 5-38
4.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-38
5. Multi Scattergrams .................................................................................... 5-39
5.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-39
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 III
5.3 Copying to clip board...........................................................................5-39
5.4 View settings........................................................................................5-40
5.5 Image...................................................................................................5-40
5.6 Image (Reference)...............................................................................5-40
6. Graph (Overlay-View) ................................................................................5-40
6.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-40
6.2 Screen composition .............................................................................5-41
6.3 Copying to the clipboard......................................................................5-41
6.4 Setting up display ................................................................................5-41
7. Meta Data ..................................................................................................5-42
7.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-42
8. Detail Results.............................................................................................5-43
8.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-43
9. Graph (Trend-View) ...................................................................................5-44
9.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-44
10. The File menu..........................................................................................5-45
10.1 File menu items .................................................................................5-45
10.2 New ...................................................................................................5-46
10.3 Open..................................................................................................5-47
10.4 Import ................................................................................................5-48
10.5 Save ..................................................................................................5-50
10.6 Printing ..............................................................................................5-52
10.7 PDF Print ...........................................................................................5-53
10.8 CSV export ........................................................................................5-55
10.9 Transmission to the host....................................................................5-56
Chapter 6 QUALITY CONTROL
1. Quality control ..............................................................................................6-1
1.1 Overview of quality control.....................................................................6-1
1.2 File Settings...........................................................................................6-2
1.3 Adding a quality control file....................................................................6-3
1.4 Deleting a quality control file..................................................................6-5
1.5 Target setting.........................................................................................6-6
1.6 Auto target .............................................................................................6-6
1.7 Deleting a quality control data ...............................................................6-7
Chapter 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Error messages............................................................................................7-1
1.1 Resetting the alarm................................................................................7-1
IV Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
1.2 Reverting from an error ......................................................................... 7-2
1.3 Display of error history .......................................................................... 7-3
2. Error message list ....................................................................................... 7-4
2.1 Error message (in alphabetical order)................................................... 7-4
2.2 Error code list ........................................................................................ 7-6
2.3 Error message list by function............................................................... 7-7
3. Error messages and troubleshooting .......................................................... 7-9
Chapter 8 SOP SETTINGS
1. SOP settings ............................................................................................... 8-1
1.1 Explanation of SOP............................................................................... 8-1
1.2 Using SOPs........................................................................................... 8-1
1.3 Registering SOPs.................................................................................. 8-1
1.4 Changing SOP's name.......................................................................... 8-2
1.5 Editing and deleting SOPs .................................................................... 8-2
1.6 SOP Import / Export .............................................................................. 8-4
Chapter 9 SYSTEM SETUP
1. System setup............................................................................................... 9-1
1.1 Setting menu items ............................................................................... 9-1
1.2 System settings..................................................................................... 9-1
2. Sheath fluid settings (Only for the FPIA-3000S) ......................................... 9-5
2.1 Effects by sheath physical characteristics............................................. 9-5
2.2 Sheath fluid specific hardware settings................................................. 9-6
Chapter 10 ANALYSIS PARAMETERS
1. Analysis parameters.................................................................................. 10-1
Chapter 11 DISPLAY SETUP
1. View settings ............................................................................................. 11-1
1.1 View settings Record list .................................................................. 11-2
1.2 View settings Result (Graph) ........................................................... 11-3
1.3 View settings Result (List)................................................................ 11-6
1.4 View settings Graph (Trend-View) ................................................... 11-7
1.5 View settings Graph (Overlay-View) ................................................ 11-9
Chapter 12 PRINT FORMAT
1. Print format ................................................................................................ 12-1
1.1 Importing File ...................................................................................... 12-2
1.2 Saving Files - All Data......................................................................... 12-4
1.3 Saving Files - Selected Data............................................................... 12-4
1.4 New format creation and editing ......................................................... 12-5
1.5 [Save New] button............................................................................. 12-24
1.6 [Delete] button................................................................................... 12-24
1.7 [Preview] button ................................................................................ 12-25
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 V
Chapter 13 USER AUTHENTICATION
1. User Authentication....................................................................................13-1
1.1 Change password................................................................................13-1
1.2 User Registration.................................................................................13-2
1.3 Lockout ..............................................................................................13-14
1.4 Setting Default Database...................................................................13-14
1.5 Change logon user ............................................................................13-15
Chapter 14 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjusting the pressure of the pneumatic unit.............................................14-1
1.1 Adjusting the pressure.........................................................................14-1
2. Adjusting the pressure of the testing unit...................................................14-2
2.1 Checking the pressure of the testing unit ............................................14-2
2.2 Pressure adjustment points .................................................................14-3
2.3 Adjustment of rinse pressure...............................................................14-4
2.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure.......................................................14-5
Chapter 15 MAINTENANCE
1. Introduction ................................................................................................15-1
2. Executing sequences.................................................................................15-1
2.1 Auto rinse ............................................................................................15-1
2.2 Revert from error .................................................................................15-2
2.3 Manual focusing...................................................................................15-2
2.4 Background Check ..............................................................................15-4
2.5 Sheath liquid exchange .......................................................................15-5
2.6 Compressor ON...................................................................................15-8
2.7 Cover open/close.................................................................................15-8
2.8 Adjustment of the flash brightness.......................................................15-8
2.9 Stir motor adjustment...........................................................................15-8
3. Changing fuses..........................................................................................15-9
3.1 Changing the fuse in the testing unit ...................................................15-9
3.2 Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit ...........................................15-10
3.3 Periodic Replacement Parts ..............................................................15-11
4. Help..........................................................................................................15-11
4.1 Table of Contents ..............................................................................15-11
4.2 Version information............................................................................15-11
Chapter 16 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1. Testing principles.......................................................................................16-1
2. Image processing.......................................................................................16-2
3. Particle analysis.........................................................................................16-3
4. Statistical analysis......................................................................................16-5
5. List of display items....................................................................................16-7
5.1 Particle diameter parameters...............................................................16-7
5.2 Form parameters .................................................................................16-8
VI Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
5.3 Other test data .................................................................................... 16-9
5.4 Statistical analysis items ..................................................................... 16-9
5.5 Analysis data..................................................................................... 16-10
Appendix A INSTALLATION
1. Preparation for installation...........................................................................A-1
1.1 Accessories...........................................................................................A-1
1.2 Place and space for installation ............................................................A-5
1.3 Exterior dimensions...............................................................................A-7
2. Installation ...................................................................................................A-8
2.1 Dismantling the fastener for transportation ...........................................A-8
2.2 Mounting the Filter Assembly No. 24 (FPIA-3000S) ...........................A-15
2.3 Connecting the tubes ..........................................................................A-17
2.4 Connecting the power cables and connection cables.........................A-22
2.5 Grounding ...........................................................................................A-25
2.6 Installing the analysis PC....................................................................A-26
3. Installation of Acrobat Reader ...................................................................A-30
Appendix B SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/
3000S
1. Specifications ..............................................................................................B-1
Appendix C TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS
1. Table of system settings............................................................................. C-1
2. Table of SOP settings ................................................................................ C-3
Appendix D OUTPUT FORMAT
1. Summary .................................................................................................... D-1
2. Serial communications ............................................................................... D-1
2.1 Hardware.............................................................................................. D-1
2.2 Communication Format ........................................................................ D-1
2.3 Signal Level.......................................................................................... D-2
2.4 Protocols used in communication with the host ................................... D-2
2.5 Class A communications...................................................................... D-2
2.6 Class B communications...................................................................... D-3
2.7 Processing of communication errors with the host............................... D-4
2.8 Monitoring the receiver (host) side....................................................... D-4
3. Ethernet communications........................................................................... D-5
3.1 Hardware.............................................................................................. D-5
3.2 Software............................................................................................... D-5
3.3 Text format ........................................................................................... D-6
3.4 Transmission format selection ............................................................. D-6
4. Data format................................................................................................. D-7
4.1 Test results (limited data)..................................................................... D-7
4.2 Histogram data..................................................................................... D-9
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 VII
4.3 Scattergram data ................................................................................ D-11
4.4 Extend data ........................................................................................ D-13
5. Particle form.............................................................................................. D-19
Appendix E GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S
RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS
1. Gas sensor level setting values .................................................................. E-1
2. List of FPIA-3000S recognized organic solvents ........................................ E-2
Appendix F FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE
1. Focus adjusting particle .............................................................................. F-1
2. Preparation of focus adjustment sample..................................................... F-2
Appendix G ULTRASONIC DISPERSION UNIT MANUAL (OPTIONAL)
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit) ................................G-1
1.1 Overview...............................................................................................G-1
2. Settings and Usage.....................................................................................G-2
2.1 Settings Details.....................................................................................G-2
2.2 SOP Settings ........................................................................................G-4
3. Background Count Generated by Erosion ..................................................G-5
3.1 When using the Standard Magnification Unit........................................G-5
3.2 When using the High Magnification Unit...............................................G-6
3.3 When using the Low Magnification Unit................................................G-7
4. Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned .............................G-7
Appendix H HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION)
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Lens Unit .................................................................... H-1
1.1 Features ............................................................................................... H-1
1.2 General Information of the Lens Unit.................................................... H-2
2. Installation................................................................................................... H-3
2.1 Preparation for installation.................................................................... H-3
2.2 Installation (Changing hardware).......................................................... H-4
3. Preparation for testing............................................................................... H-11
3.1 Starting the analysis program............................................................. H-11
4. Testing ...................................................................................................... H-18
5. Analyze ..................................................................................................... H-19
6. SOP settings............................................................................................. H-20
7. Specifications (High Magnification Objective Lens Unit)........................... H-21
8. Specifications (Low Magnification Objective Lens Unit) ........................... H-26
Appendix I PART11 SOFTWARE MANUAL (OPTIONAL)
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Software Conforming to Part 11) .........................I-1
1.1 Features .................................................................................................I-1
2. Installation of the Part 11 Software...............................................................I-2
VIII Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
2.1 Install ...................................................................................................... I-2
3. Using the FPIA-3000 Part 11 Software ........................................................ I-3
3.1 Preparation for testing............................................................................ I-3
3.2 Testing ................................................................................................... I-3
3.3 Stored Data Display and Processing ..................................................... I-3
3.4 Error Treatment ...................................................................................... I-3
3.5 SOP settings .......................................................................................... I-3
3.6 User Verification..................................................................................... I-3
3.7 Audit Trail Function ................................................................................ I-4
3.8 Others .................................................................................................... I-4
4. Audit trail ...................................................................................................... I-6
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ I-6
4.2 Reviewing audit trail ............................................................................... I-6
4.3 CSV Export ............................................................................................ I-8
4.4 Print ........................................................................................................ I-8
4.5 Filter ....................................................................................................... I-9
Appendix J FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL
1. Overview ..................................................................................................... J-1
1.1 Overview............................................................................................... J-1
1.2 Principle of Dark Field Test ................................................................... J-1
2. Installation ................................................................................................... J-2
3. Specifications .............................................................................................. J-3
4. Changing hardware..................................................................................... J-4
5. Starting the analysis program.................................................................... J-10
5.1 Starting the analysis program ............................................................. J-10
5.2 Replacing the Sheath Fluid................................................................. J-12
5.3 Process executed after replacing the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit ....... J-15
5.4 Checking Light Field System............................................................... J-15
6. Testing....................................................................................................... J-16
7. Analyze...................................................................................................... J-17
8. SOP settings ............................................................................................. J-18
9. Maintenance.............................................................................................. J-28
9.1 Quality Control .................................................................................... J-28
9.2 Adjustment of the flash brightness...................................................... J-28
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
Chapter 1 FOR YOUR SAFETY
1. How to use this product safely .................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Explanation of labeling.......................................................................... 1-1
2. Introduction.................................................................................................. 1-5
3. Signs ........................................................................................................... 1-6
4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).......................................................... 1-7
FOR YOUR SAFETY
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 1-1
1. How to use this product safely
Read this section and the Operators Manual carefully before using the instrument.
For proper and safe use of this product and to prevent injury to the user and other people or damage
to property, precautionary notes are inserted with signs to draw your attention as shown below.
The illustrations and meaning are described in the following.
Be sure to understand the meaning of these signs before proceeding to read this document.
1.1 Explanation of labeling
WARNING
Mishandling of the instrument by ignoring this note may cause death or
severe injury to the user and/or serious physical damage to property.
CAUTION
Mishandling of the instrument by ignoring this note may cause injury to the
user, affect output results or cause physical damage to property.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
1-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005
WARNING
If you smell something strange or notice fumes, turn off the power switch immediately, and unplug
the power cord.
Failure to do so could result in fire, electrocution or injury.
Contact your dealer or the nearest Sysmex office immediately for an inspection.
Do not spill liquids, such as reagents, and do not put metallic items such as staples or clips inside
the instrument, to avoid short circuits or fumes.
Shorting and smoke emission could result. Should any abnormality occur, turn off the instrument
immediately, unplug the power cord the outlet, and contact your dealer or the Sysmex office for an
inspection.
Never open the instrument cover or case while the instrument is running.
Doing so may result in electric shock or injury.
Be sure to wear rubber gloves during maintenance or inspection.
Use the specified tools and components.
After finishing work, wash your hands with disinfectant.
Pay special attention when handling waste liquid.
If your body or clothes come in contact with waste water, wash it off with disinfectant.
Handling of organic solvents
Do not use fire when you use inflammable organic solvents.
It may cause fire.
Ventilate the instrument circumference.
It may cause a fire or exposure to toxic substance.
Please install the fire extinguisher corresponding to the organic solvent near the instrument.
When you preparing a sample, exchange sheath liquid or waste liquid, please use protection
implements (e.g. glove, mask, glasses) according to the MSDS.
If you swallow a reagent or get it in your eyes or on your skin, take first-aid action according to the
MSDS, and call a doctor immediately.
When you use an organic solvent, please take necessary measures according to MSDS.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
WARNING
Use of reagents
If a reagent gets into your eyes, wash it off with running water, and see a doctor immediately.
If you swallow a reagent by mistake, call a doctor immediately and drink large amounts of water to
induce vomiting.
If your hands or skin come in contact with a reagent, wash it off with running water.
Discard waste liquid and consumables for the instrument according to the rules governing industrial
waste, etc.
Do not modify the instrument.
Voltage, connection and grounding of the power unit:
Do not plug the power cord into any electric outlet other than 100 V.
Doing so can cause fire or electric shock.
The instrument must be given a ground (earth) connection when it is first installed.
Doing so can cause fire or electric shock.
Handling power cables
Do not damage, put a heavy item onto, or pull the power cord by force.
Doing so can cause fire or electric shock due to a short circuit or disconnection.
Be sure to turn off the instrument before connecting a peripheral (a printer, etc.) or to the host
computer.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
1-4 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
CAUTION
Use of reagents
After opening the container, make sure that no dust, dirt or bacteria get in.
Do not use a reagent that has passed its expiry date.
Handle reagents carefully so that no bubbles are formed in them.
Be careful not to spill reagents. If they spill, wipe them off with a wet cloth immediately.
Follow the directions given on the container.
If you consider yourself to be inexperienced in using the instrument, be sure to use it under guidance
or with the assistance of an experienced person.
In the event of any malfunction of the instrument, the administrator of the instrument should first
attempt to solve the problem according to the instructions explicitly described in this manual. If there
are no appropriate instructions in the manual, contact your dealer or the Sysmex office for an
inspection.
Unpacking, installation and confirmation of the initial operation are to be performed by service
personnel from your dealer or a Sysmex office.
About the environment of operation:
Install the instrument in a place where there is no risk of it being splashed with water.
Avoid high temperatures, high humidity, dust or direct sunlight.
Do not subject the instrument to strong vibrations or shocks.
Do not install the instrument in the vicinity of chemicals or gas.
Handling of software:
In the data processing unit, do not install software other than that specified by Sysmex to avoid
abnormal operation of software.
The software might not function normally in some circumstances.
Exit the FPIA-3000 application before executing any other application.
When connecting peripherals:
We do not guarantee connectiion availability between printers or peripherals and personal
computers.
Contact any manufacturers of personal computers or peripherals you use.
Use the built-in hard disk for the data storage folder to store test data obtained using the FPIA-3000.
Do not use peripheral equipment such as an external hard disk for the database folder to store test
data since the use of such device might prevent the FPIA-3000 from performing its normal test
operation.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
2. Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Sysmex
FPIA-3000/3000S Flow Particle Image analyzer.

Use this product correctly, after reading this manual thoroughly.
After you have read this manual, store it in a safe place where it will be easily available for later
reference.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
3. Signs
What They Mean
Signs used in the explanations for operating the instrument
Explanations of operation methods in this manual use the following notation:
A button name within brackets means a button for a data-processing program.
(e.g., [OK], [Cancel] )
[XYZ] also indicates the name of a menu.
(e.g., [File], [Stored data screen] )
WARNING
This indicates situations where working while carrying a static charge
could result in explosive ignition by static electricity.
WARNING
Mishandling of the instrument by ignoring this note may cause death or
severe injury to the user and/or serious physical damage to property.
CAUTION
Mishandling of the instrument by ignoring this note may cause injury to the
user, affect output results or cause physical damage to property.
CAUTION: Items that users should know in order to maintain the performance of and
prevent damage to the instrument.
NOTE: Information that is useful to know when using the instrument.
NOTE: Some of the screens that appear in this document may be different from what
you actually see on your screen or print out.
Because of ongoing improvements made to the product, some of the
descriptions contained in this document may not apply to the specific product
you are using.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 1-7
4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
This instrument complies to the following IEC(EN) standards.
IEC61326:2002(EN61326:1997+A1:1998+A2:2000+A3:2003)
Equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use EMC Requirements.
EMS(Electro-magnetic susceptibility(=interference radiation))
For this issue the minimum requirements with regards to immunity are fulfilled.
EMI(Electro-magnetic interference(=resistance to jamming))
For this issue the requirements of class A are fulfilled.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
Blank page.
Chapter 2 EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONS
1. Overview of the device................................................................................ 2-1
2. System configuration................................................................................... 2-2
3. Overview of screen displays and switches.................................................. 2-3
3.1 Names of components of the testing unit .............................................. 2-3
3.2 Screen display of the data processing unit ........................................... 2-4
4. Emergency stop .......................................................................................... 2-6
5. Types of alarms........................................................................................... 2-6
6. Packaging.................................................................................................... 2-7
7. Installation ................................................................................................... 2-7
7.1 Installing and moving the instrument..................................................... 2-7
7.2 Installation location................................................................................ 2-7
7.3 Grounding ............................................................................................. 2-8
8. Reagents ..................................................................................................... 2-8
9. Names and functions of the components of the FPIA-3000/3000S .......... 2-11
9.1 Front panel/right front panel ................................................................ 2-11
9.2 Rear side of the testing unit ................................................................ 2-13
9.3 Pneumatic unit .................................................................................... 2-15
10. Disposal................................................................................................... 2-17
EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONS
1. Overview of the device
The FPIA-3000 is a Flow Particle Image analyzer combining flat sheath flow formation technology
and image processing technology.
The FPIA-3000 guides a suspension of particles to a transparent flow cell to form a flat sample
flow, and irradiates pulse light to the flat sample flow to take images of the particles. All captured
images can be displayed at once after testing. By analyzing the images of particles, information
such as the sizes and shapes of the particles can be obtained for analysis and display of histograms.
Particle images of up to 1,000 samples can be stored in the image storage device.
Other than PARTICLE SHEATH, four other types of alcohol can be used as dispersant.
The FPIA-3000S instrument is an improved version of the FPIA-3000 against the solvent resistant
characteristics, to expand the applicable dispersion medium over PARTICLE SHEATH and 4
kinds of lower alcohol.
Those particle that is difficult to disperse either in the PARTICLE SHEATH or the low alcohol or
those particle that is deformed by dissolving, shrinking or expanding can be analyzed by the FPIA-
3000S by dispersing in a suitable organic solvent that meets with the particle characteristics.
Dispersion medium of the PARTICLE SHEATH and variety of organic solvents can be used.
You can view particle images and histogram analysis results of previously tested samples while
performing a test.
Cell size distributions and histogram analysis results can also be output to a printer or a host
computer.
Exterior view of this system and its peripherals
Figure 2-1: Testing unit and analysis unit of the FPIA-3000/3000S
Testing unit
Data processing unit
Monitor
Mouse
(Input device)
Keyboard
(Input device)
Reagent
Pneumatic unit
2. System configuration
Figure 2-2: System configuration
The FPIA-3000 is composed of three units as described below.
FPIA-3000/3000S testing unit
(1) Testing unit
Captures particle images.
(2) Pneumatic unit
Supplies the testing unit with the required positive and negative pressures.
FPIA-3000/3000S analysis unit
(3) Data processing unit (analysis PC)
It analyzes and displays particle images captured by the testing unit.
CAUTION
In the data processing unit, do not install software other than that specified by
Sysmex. The software may not operate normally.
For data processing, prepare the personal computer that meets specifications
we require. For details about the specification, contact your dealer or the
nearest Sysmex office.
External monitor
Printer
Host computer
Storage device
PC for Analysis
Pneumatic unit
Testing unit
Standard Configuration
3. Overview of screen displays and switches
The FPIA-3000/3000S carries out all operations in the data processing unit. The data-processing
program runs under Windows, and most of the operations can be executed using a mouse.
3.1 Names of components of the testing unit
Figure 2-3: Components of the analysis unit
(1) STATUS lamp
The lamp displays the status of the unit with 3-color LEDs
Green: the system is ready to run tests.
Yellow: a sequence is running.
Red: the system is not ready to run tests.
(2) Power switch
Press this switch to turn the power on or off. This switch is also used to stop the device in an
emergency during a test.
(1) STATUS lamp
(2) Power switch
3.2 Screen display of the data processing unit
Figure 2-4: The display screen
(1) The menu bar
Menu items for operations that can be performed by the FPIA-3000/3000S are displayed here.
The items in the menu bar may be unavailable for selection, depending on the authorization
gained at logon, the screen currently displayed, the record data and other factors.
(2) Tabs
Tabs can be used to specify how analysis results should be displayed.
Item Tab content
Record List A tabular list of all analysis results stored in the DB is displayed.
Analysis Results Frequency distributions and other aspects of the analysis results are displayed
for the record selected in the record list.
Particle Image List All particle images are displayed for the record selected in the record list.
Frequency Table The frequency table for analysis results is displayed for the record selected in
the record list.
Meta Data Data such as system status and settings at the time of analysis are displayed
for the record selected in the record list.
Detail Results All analysis results for particle diameter and form parameters are displayed.
Multi Scattergrams The scattergram trend across multiple analysis results is displayed for the
records selected in the record list.
Graph(Overlay-View) The frequency distributions for multiple analysis results are displayed
superimposed on one graph for the records selected in the record list.
Graph(Trend-View) The trend graph for multiple analysis results is displayed for the records
selected in the record list.
Table 2-1: Tab display items
(1) The menu bar
(3) Status bar
(2) Tabs
(3) Status bar
The items displayed in the status bar are as listed below:
(4) Menu Icons
Item Display Content of the item
System status Green Lights when the system is ready to run tests.
Red Lights when the system is not ready to run
tests.
Yellow Lights when a sequence is running.
Status (Display examples)
Standby
Testing
Shutdown
Not Ready
Pneumatic unit off
Not connecting to the main
unit
Messages are displayed according to the
testing unit status.
No. of records Stored: XXX
Display: XXX
[Stored] column displays total number of
stored. [Display] column shows the number of
records that are displayed as records.
Log-on ID status Log-on Name The log-on name is displayed.
Log-on Group Name The log-on group name is displayed.
Table 2-2: Status bar display items
Create a new database. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, New.)
Open an existing database. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, Open.)
Saves selected data into another database. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, Save.)
Executes printing. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, Printing.)
Opens [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog. (For details, refer to Chapter 4, Test
information setting.)
NOTE: Users can prevent the display of Menu icons. For details refer to Appendix C, TABLE OF
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
4. Emergency stop
If the instrument requires an emergency stop during testing or other operations, turn OFF the power
switch for the FPIA-3000/3000S testing unit.
5. Types of alarms
The FPIA-3000/3000S generates four types of alarms to indicate different state as described below.
(1) Error sound (peep)
This alarm sounds when some abnormalities occur in the testing unit. It will continue to sound
until the [Stop Alarm] button is pressed.
(2) Test start (pi pi pip)
This alarm sounds when a sample has been loaded into the instrument and the [Start] button
is pressed.
(3) Auto focusing (pip pip pip)
This tone sounds every time the auto-focusing mechanism moves one step during auto
focusing.
(4) Reverted from error (pip)
This sound is heard when the device reverts from an error.
WARNING
If the instrument fails and the organic solvent leaks inside the testing unit,
following error messages will be displayed. Immediately turn OFF the power
switch of the FPIA-3000/3000S testing unit, and consult a Sysmex service
representative for assistance.
There is a potential to get fire or explosion when evaporated gas catches fire.
Error messages when detecting leakage of the organic solvent:
Error message Description
Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit. A gas sensor detected a solvent
leakage in the hydraulic unit.
Solvent is Leaked from detector. A gas sensor detected a solvent leak in
the optical detector unit.
6. Packaging
The instrument is thoroughly checked before it leaves the factory, and it is packaged with care to
withstand shock during transport. Once the instrument is delivered, check all packages to confirm
that none are damaged on the outside.
personnel from your dealer or a Sysmex office. Each unit of the device is packaged separately.
7. Installation
7.1 Installing and moving the instrument
Installation of the FPIA-3000/3000S and its peripherals is to be performed by a Sysmex service
representative. If the device has to be moved after it has been installed, contact your Sysmex service
representative.
Any problem caused as a result of moving it by the user will not be covered by the warranty even
if the problem occurs within the warranty period. Please note this.
7.2 Installation location
NOTE: See Appendix A, 1.1 Accessories for details of the accessories.
WARNING
Do not use fire when using flammable organic solvents. It may cause fire.
Please install the fire extinguisher suitable for the organic solvent near the
instrument.
WARNING
When an organic solvent is used as the sheath fluid, install a local ventilation
device and make ventilation around the FPIA-3000/3000S. It may cause a fire
or exposure to toxic substance.
The organic solvent evaporated from the sample chamber is exhausted from
the opening located center top of the FPIA-3000/3000S rear panel, shown in the
Figure 2-5. When a local ventilation device is used, efficiently aspirate the gas
exhausted from this opening with a duct.
Exhaust opening from the sample chamber
Figure 2-5: Exhaust Opening in the center top of the FPIA-3000S Rear Panel
7.3 Grounding
The instrument power supply cord uses a three-prong plug. When the power supply socket is
provided with grounding, simply plug it to the socket. If the socket is not a three-prong grounded
socket, use the adapter plug provided and connect the ground cable.
Figure 2-6: Power Cord Plugs
8. Reagents
WARNING
The instrument must always be grounded when operated. Inadequate
grounding may cause electric shock.
CAUTION
The testing unit and pneumatic unit each have their own power cords.
Therefore, two power sockets are required.
CAUTION
Do not spill the organic solvent nor the PARTICLE SHEATH. If spilt, turn OFF
the instrument power switch, disconnect the power cord, and take the
necessary action by referring to the MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet).
FPIA-3000S specifications are assured only when the PARTICLE SHEATH is
used as the sheath fluid. When any other sheath fluid than PARTICLE SHEATH
is used, the particle image may be different due to the refractive index of the
sheath fluid used. Accordingly, the analysis results of the particle diameter and
the circularity may be different from those analyzed using the PARTICLE
SHEATH.
WARNING
When a flammable organic solvent is used as a sheath fluid, make a ventilation
around the instrument by installing a local ventilation device, if required. It may
cause a fire or exposure to toxic substance.
Do not use fire near the instrument when a flammable organic solvent is used
as a sheath fluid. It may cause fire.
In the case of fire, install a fire extinguisher suitable to the organic solvent to be
used.
When handling the organic solvent, follow the instructions given in the MSDS
(Material Safety Data Sheet).
When an organic solvent is used for the sheath fluid, after shutting down the
instrument, securely cap the solvent container and the waste container and
store them in a safe place. If the solvent container and the waste container are
left without capping, it may cause fire or explosion after gas is filled in the room.
(1) sheath liquid (PARTICLE SHEATH)
The FPIA-3000 uses PARTICLE SHEATH as sheath liquid and rinse fluid. PARTICLE
SHEATH is aspirated into the instrument each time a test is conducted. For each test,
approximately 130 mL of PARTICLE SHEATH are used.
Figure 2-7: PARTICLE SHEATH container
(2) Sheath liquid (alcohol type)
If alcohol is used as the dispersant in this instrument, the sheath liquid must be changed to the
same alcohol. Use alcohol as specified below.
(3) Sheath liquid (Organic solvent-only for FPIA-3000S)
When an organic solvent is used as a dispersion medium, use the same organic solvent as a
sheath fluid to form a stable flat sheath.
The FPIA-3000S uses a specific hydraulic part listed in the Table 2-4 FPIA-3000S Hydraulic
Part Material that is resistant to the organic solvent, to prevent those hydraulic part from being
affected when the organic solvent listed in the APPENDIX E, GAS SENSOR SETTING
VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS is used as the
sheath fluid.
However, the APPENDIX E, GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-
3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS shows the applicability and compatibility of
the hydraulic parts against the organic solvent, well focused particle images may not be
obtained depending on the viscosity and specific gravity of the organic solvent since a stable
sheath is not formed. If the ignition point, the boiling point, or the melting point is very low,
there is a potential of a fire or an explosion.
Alcohol Standard for compliance
Methanol JIS K 8891
Ethanol JIS K 8101
Isopropanol JIS K 8838
Ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%) JIS K 8105
Table 2-3: Alcohol compliance standards
NOTE: The FPIA-3000/3000S forms a flat sample flow to a flow cell to capture focused particle
images. The sheath liquid is the reagent used for forming the flat sheath flow.
PARTICLE SHEATH
Check if the organic solvent to be applied is suitable with the Table 2-5 Specifications of the
Organic Solvent applicable to the FPIA-3000S, and handle the solvent according to the MSDS
(Material Safety Data Sheet).
Hydraulic Part Material Used
Chamber Glass, Stainless Steel (SUS316)
Tube Teflon (FEP), Perfluoro-elastomer
Fitting Teflon (PTFE), Peek resign, Stainless steel (SUS316)
Seal Perfluoro-elastomer
Cylinder, Valve wetted Peek resign
Table 2-4: FPIA-3000S Hydraulic Part Material
Ignition point 200C or higher
Boiling point 60C or higher
Melting point 20C or lower
Viscosity 0.3 - 2.0 [mPas] (at 25C)
Specific gravity 0.65 or higher
Table 2-5: Specifications of the Organic Solvent applicable to the FPIA-3000S
9. Names and functions of the components of the FPIA-3000/3000S
9.1 Front panel/right front panel
Figure 2-8: Front panel/right front panel of the testing unit
(1) STATUS lamp
You can judge whether the unit is ready to run tests. When the FPIA-3000 is ready to test, this
lamp lights up in green.
(2) Electricity caution mark
(3) Cover open/close caution mark
(4) Mixing caution mark
WARNING
If the organic solvent is used, discharge static electricity by touching any
grounded metal before starting to operate it. Otherwise, there is the risk of alcohol
ignition.
WARNING
The testing unit cover opens and closes automatically during testing. Keep your
fingers well clear of the cover.
WARNING
Keep clear of the mixing motor and mixing blades when pouring reagents.
(1) STATUS lamp
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Mixing motor
(6) Testing unit cover
(7) Pressure regulator unit cover
(8) Pressure regulator for rinsing
(9) Bellows pressure governor
(10) Power switch
(5) Mixing motor
This motor mixes the sample.
(6) Testing unit cover
This cover protects the mixing motor and the reagent chamber.
(7) Pressure regulator unit cover
Open this cover to adjust the pressure. Press underneath to open it.
(8) Pressure regulator for rinsing
Used to adjust the pressure for rinsing in the testing unit.
(9) Bellows pressure governor
Used to adjust the vacuum of the testing unit.
(10)Power switch
Used to turn the device on and off.
WARNING
Turning off the power switch while the instrument is operating may result in a
permanent damage to the instrument system. Be sure to run the shutdown
operation before turning off the instrument power switch.
Do not turn the instrument On and Off repeatedly in a short period of time.
9.2 Rear side of the testing unit
Figure 2-9: Rear side of the testing unit
(1) Data communications connector (IOIOI)
Not normally used.
(2) Electricity caution mark
(3) Video output connector ( )
Connected to a screen-output device such as a monitor, to check the image from the CCD
camera.
(4) Data communications connector ( )
Connected to the Data Processing Unit via the accessory cable.
(5) Fuse holder
The fuse is connected here.
(6) Main power connector
Connected to the power socket via the accessory cable.
WARNING
If touching the connector, discharge static electricity by touching any grounded
metal before starting to operate it. Otherwise, there is the risk of permanent
damage to the units.
(7)
(6) Main power connector
(5) Fuse holder
(4) Data communications
connector ( )
(3) Video output connector ( )
(2)
(1) Data communications connector (IOIOI)
(13) Overflow drain nipple
(OVERFLOW)
(12) Waste-solution drain nipple
(WASTE)
(11) Sheath liquid aspiration
nipple (SHEATH LIQUID)
(10) Vacuum supply nipple (VACUUM)
(9) Pressure supply nipple (PRESSURE)
(8) Pneumatic unit control output connector
(PU CONTROL)
(7)
(8) Pneumatic unit control output connector (PU CONTROL)
Connected to the pneumatic unit control input connector via the accessory cable.
(9) Pressure supply nipple (PRESSURE)
Connected to the pressure supply nipple of the pneumatic unit.
(10)Vacuum supply nipple (VACUUM)
Connected to the vacuum supply nipple of the pneumatic unit.
(11)Sheath liquid aspiration nipple (SHEATH LIQUID)
Connected to the sheath liquid and rinse fluid.
(12)Waste-solution drain nipple (WASTE)
Drains the waste solution. Connected to the drain hole or the waste-solution container.
(13)Overflow drain nipple (OVERFLOW)
Drains fluid that overflows from the reagent chamber.
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, disconnect the power cord before changing the fuse.
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock.
Replace only with fuse of the specified type and current ratings. Otherwise, the
instrument could give off smoke.
9.3 Pneumatic unit
Front
Figure 2-10: Front of the pneumatic unit
(1) 0.22 MPa pressure regulator
This regulator adjusts the pressure supplied to the testing unit to 0.22 MPa.
(2) Pilot lamp
Lights when the pneumatic unit power is switched on.
(2) Pilot lamp
(1) 0.22 MPa pressure regulator
Rear
Figure 2-11: Rear of the pneumatic unit
(1) Pressure output nipple
Supplies pressure to the testing unit. Connected to the pressure supply nipple of the testing unit.
(2) Vacuum output nipple
Supplies vacuum pressure to the testing unit. Connected to the vacuum supply nipple of the
testing unit.
(3) Fuse
This is a time-lag fuse for 250 V, 4 A. Do not connect any fuse that does not match this rating.
(4) Power connector
Supplies power via the accessory power cord.
(5) Pneumatic unit control input connector
This connector is used to send signals from the testing unit to turn the pneumatic unit on and
off. Connects to the pneumatic unit control output connector the testing unit.
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, disconnect the power cord before changing the fuse.
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock.
Replace only with fuse of the specified type and current ratings. Otherwise, the
instrument could give off smoke.
Specifications Product code Name Type
117 V-type 266-5011-3 Fuse 250V, 4A ST4-4A-N1 Time lag
220/240 V-type 266-5293-0 Fuse 250V, 3.15A, No.19195 Time lag
Table 2-6: Fuse rating
(1) Pressure output nipple
(2) Vacuum output nipple
(3) Fuse
(4) Power connector
(5) Pneumatic unit control input connector
10. Disposal
Disposal procedures should meet the requirement of all applicable local regulations.
In EU countries, when you dispose this equipment based on EU directive, 2002/96/EC, please
contact your dealer or local Sysmex representative.
The symbol indicated in the back panel is meaning separate collection in accordance
with the EU directive, 2002/96/EC.
When the system was using particle sheath, it has not drained even if shutdown procedure was
done. Drain particle sheath according to the following procedures before the instrument is disposed.
If the system was using alcohol, it has drained by doing shutdown procedure. Do not need to do this
procedure.
1 Select [Maintenance] - [Sequence] - [Sheath Liquid exchange]. The following dialog will be
displayed. Click on the [Run] button.
Figure 2-12: [Replace Sheath Liquid] dialog
2 When the sheath liquid has been discharged from inside the instrument, the following dialog
appears. Turn off the testing unit.
Figure 2-13: [Cleaning Pressure Settings] dialog
3 Click on the [Run] button. The following dialog appears, then Click on the button.
Figure 2-14: [Sheath Liquid Replacement Sequence] dialog
4 Error History screen is displayed. Click on the [Close] button.
Figure 2-15: [Error History] screen
5 Select [File] - [Exit]. The following dialog is displayed. Click on the [Yes] button, then the
analysis program ends.
Figure 2-16: [End of Data Management Unit] dialog
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005
Chapter 3 PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING
1. Items to be checked before turning on the device....................................... 3-1
1.1 Reagents............................................................................................... 3-1
1.2 Printer paper (when connected to a printer).......................................... 3-1
1.3 Instrument inspection............................................................................ 3-1
2. Turning on the device.................................................................................. 3-2
3. Starting the analysis program and background check ................................ 3-3
3.1 Starting the analysis program ............................................................... 3-3
3.2 Sheath liquid replacement..................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Background Check................................................................................ 3-7
3.4 Auto Focusing ....................................................................................... 3-9
PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING
1. Items to be checked before turning on the device
1.1 Reagents
1 Check that there is a sufficient amount of reagent for the scheduled tests.
Get a replacement reagent ready if there is not enough reagent.
2 Refer to Chapter 2, 8. Reagents, for the reagents that can be used as sheath liquid.
1.2 Printer paper (when connected to a printer)
When outputting the test results to a printer, check that the amount of printer paper is sufficient.
1.3 Instrument inspection
Check the tube and cable connections. Specifically, check that the connectors are firmly connected
and the tubes are not bent.
CAUTION
Do not use a reagent that has passed its expiry date. The expiry date of each
reagent is written on the label of the container or on the box. Once the package
is opened, the contents must be consumed within 60 days.
Leave the reagent container at room temperature before use. Use the reagent
at 1530C.
If there is a chance that the reagent might have frozen, leave it to reach room
temperature, then shake the container well to homogenize the solution. Before
using the solution, make sure that there are no bubbles. Ignoring any of the
above precautions may result in inaccurate test results.
2. Turning on the device
1 Testing Unit
Turn on the testing unit, referring to the diagram below.
Figure 3-1: Turning on the Testing Unit
2 Monitor
Switch on the power to the monitor as described in the manual for that monitor.
3 Data Processing Unit
Switch on the power to the unit as described in the manual for that PC.
When the data processing unit is turned on, Windows starts up.
NOTE: The power supply for the pneumatic unit is turned on automatically after the main unit
power is turned on and the FPIA-3000 application logon operation is complete.
Power switch
3. Starting the analysis program and background check
The FPIA-3000/3000S uses rights management to limit its users. Refer to Chapter 13, USER
AUTHENTICATION for more on setting logon IDs and passwords etc.
3.1 Starting the analysis program
1 Double click on the FPIA-3000/3000S shortcut on the Windows desktop.
The logon dialog box appears.
2 Enter the logon ID and password, as in table 3-1, then press the [OK] button.
Figure 3-2: [Logon] dialog
NOTE: If the FPIA-3000/3000S does not start, use one of the methods below to start it.
Click through Windows taskbar [Start] button [Programs] [Sysmex] [FPIA-
3000].
Double click on [FPIA-3000.exe], which is directly below the install folder.
Set Items
Logon ID Enter the previously assigned logon ID.
For details on input text format etc., refer to Chapter 13, USER
AUTHENTICATION.
Password Enter the previously assigned password.
The input password will be displayed as a string of asterisks *.
For details on input text format etc., refer to Chapter 13, USER
AUTHENTICATION.
[Start Testing Unit?]
check box
When there is no need to start up the testing unit, for example when just
referencing data, put a check in No (PC Only).
[OK] button This starts up the analysis program.
[Cancel] button Cancel FPIA-3000/3000S startup.
Table 3-1: Logon screen items
NOTE: The logon ID and password are case sensitive.
NOTE: Use this for reference when logging in for the first time after the FPIA-3000/3000S
application is installed.
General user password registration
When installing, use the following for reference and set user name and password. Be
aware that only the login with administrator group authority allows you to set a
password.
1) Select [Settings] [User Authentication] [User Registration] and execute.
2) Press the [Add] button on the user information tab and set the logon ID and
password here. For the more detailed procedure, refer to Chapter 13, USER
AUTHENTICATION.
System administrator password registration
This system is set at the factory with the following registered as the logon ID for the
default administrator group.
Logon ID: admin
Password: admin
The following logon IDs are also registered as defaults.
Logon ID: guest
Password: guest
Logon ID: manager
Password: manager
Use [Settings] [User Authentication] [User Registration] to make changes as
appropriate.
(Log on with Logon ID: Admin and Password: Admin, create the logon user with the
administrator group, logon again with the logon user you just created, then change the
password etc. above.)
When you start up the FPIA-3000/3000S, the Windows logon ID appears in the [Logon
ID] field of the logon dialog box.
Registering the same ID with the Windows logon ID saves entering the ID when you
start up the FPIA-3000/3000S.
CAUTION
[Setting] button
Setting button is only available when the HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS
UNIT or the DARK FIELD UNIT is mounted.
Refer to Appendix H, HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL
(OPTION) and Appendix J, FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL for details
of each unit.
3.2 Sheath liquid replacement
If the sheath liquid is PARTICLE SHEATH
1 Run the program.
The following dialog box will appear and the startup process will be executed.
When the startup process is complete, the system enters standby mode.
Figure 3-3: [Startup Sequence] dialog
If the sheath liquid is not PARTICLE SHEATH
1 Run the program.
When any other sheath fluid than PARTICLE SHEATH was connected in the previous shutting
down, FPIA-3000/3000S was turned OFF after the sheath fluid inside unit is completely
exhausted for the safety reason.
The following dialog box will appear:
Press to change sheath liquid.
A list of sheath liquid options is displayed, so select the one to use.
Figure 3-4: [Startup Settings] dialog
2 Connect the sheath liquid to be used to the sheath liquid aspiration nipple.
Figure 3-5: sheath liquid replacement
3 Check that the tube is correctly connected to the sheath liquid aspiration nipple, then press the
[Run] button. The following dialog will be displayed.
Figure 3-6: [Cleaning Pressure Settings] dialog
4 Set the rinse pressure to match the sheath liquid used.
When the pressure display turns green, press the [Run] button. (Refer to Chapter 14, Adjustment
of rinse pressure)
The startup process runs.
CAUTION:
After switching the instrument power on, wait for at least one hour for its internal
temperature to stabilize.
Once the internal temperature of the instrument has stabilized, follow the
procedure on the next page to run a background error check and auto focus.
sheath liquid aspiration nipple
Connect to sheath liquid container
3.3 Background Check
1 After checking the sheath liquid to be used, the dialog in Figure 3-7 is displayed.
To carry out a background check here, press the [Run] button.
Figure 3-7: [Start Background Test] dialog
2 A background check is run automatically, and the results are displayed as shown below.
Figure 3-8: [Background Check Results] screen
3 Press the [Run] button to repeat the background check or the [Cancel] button to end
background checking.
To skip the background check and execute it later, press [Cancel] button in the dialog in
Figure 3-7. The background check is skipped. To execute a background check later, execute
[Test] [Test]. Figure 3-9 is displayed.
Here, press the [Check Background] button of the [Testing/Analysis Parameters]
dialog.
The dialog in Figure 3-7 is displayed, so press the [Run] button, and execute the background
check with the procedure from 2 on.
(If you cancel the background check, the system moves immediately to the automatic focus
adjustment.)
Figure 3-9: [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog
The allowable background values within which the accuracy of the FPIA-3000 is guaranteed are
listed below.
NOTE: Standard background check values
The numbers of particles detected in the HPF (High Power Field) and the LPF (Low
Power Field) are counted.
Measurement mode Allowable limits (count)
HPF 10
LPF 10
Table 3-2: Allowable ranges for background values
3.4 Auto Focusing
1 After the background check is finished, the dialog in Figure 3-10 is displayed. To adjust the
focus automatically, press the [Run] button.
Figure 3-10: [Start Focus Ajustment] dialog
2 The auto focus pre-processing sequence is executed. After a while, the following dialog will be
displayed. Load the adjustment sample now.
Figure 3-11: [Auto Focus Sequence] dialog
3 Dispense 5ml of a sample prepared to focus adjusting particle into the sample chamber, as
instructed by the action message.
4 Press the [Start] button.
The focus is adjusted automatically.
After focus adjustment, a check test is run automatically using the same sample.
5 After the test is complete, a record of automatic focus adjustment is generated and the system
returns to the ready state.
NOTE: For focus adjusting particle, refer to Appendix F, FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE.
To skip the auto focus adjustment and execute it later, press [Cancel] button in the dialog in Figure
3-10. You can adjust the auto focus later.
To adjust the auto focus later, execute [Test] [Test]. Figure 3-12 is displayed. Here, press the
[Auto Focus] button of the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog. The dialog in Figure 3-10
is displayed, so adjust the auto focus with the procedure from 2 onward.
Chapter 4 TESTING
1. Test flow...................................................................................................... 4-1
2. Check instrument status.............................................................................. 4-2
3. Test information setting............................................................................... 4-4
3.1 Sample information setting.................................................................... 4-4
3.2 SOP setting........................................................................................... 4-5
3.3 Measurement condition settings ........................................................... 4-6
3.4 Analysis conditions................................................................................ 4-8
3.5 Setting instrument conditions................................................................ 4-9
4. Test procedure .......................................................................................... 4-11
4.1 Preparing a sample............................................................................. 4-11
4.2 Testing a sample................................................................................. 4-12
5. Display of analysis results ......................................................................... 4-14
6. Shutting down (turning off the power) ....................................................... 4-15
TESTING
1. Test flow
Figure 4-1: Test flow
means the job is to be performed by the operator.
means the job is to be performed by the device.
Turning on the device
(page 3-2)
Changing the sheath liquid (page 3-5)
Startup process
Waiting for the internal
temperature to stabilize
Background check
(page 3-7)
Auto Focusing
(page 3-9)
Setting the analysis information
Checking the STATUS lamp is lit
(page 4-4)
(page 4-2)
Pressing the [Start test] button (page 4-12)
Auto rinse
Installing the sample
Pressing the [Start] button
(page 4-13)
(page 4-13)
Test
Auto rinsing
Displaying the results
Reanalyzing the results
Shutting down the device (page 4-15)
TESTING
2. Check instrument status
1 Check that the STATUS lamp next to the testing unit cover is green.
If it is not green, the testing unit is busy or an error has occurred.
Check for software messages or error status indicators.
(Refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING).
Figure 4-2: STATUS lamp
2 Check that the testing unit status indicator signal for the software is green. If an error occurs in
the testing unit, the signal turns red. Testing is not possible.
Refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING and solve the error.
Figure 4-3: Testing unit status indicator
STATUS lamp
TESTING
3 Select [Test][Test].
The [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog appears.
4 Check that the status for each unit is green.
The statuses will not all turn green unless the background check, auto focus adjustment, etc. are
executed.
5 If the status is red, take appropriate action, using the following as reference.
Status in dialog Reason displayed Page reference
Next to the [Check
Background] button, Not
Tested is displayed in red.
This is displayed if no
background check has been
executed since the testing
unit power was switched ON.
Press the [Check Background] button
in the dialog and execute the
background check.
Next to the [Auto Focus]
button, Not Tested is
displayed in red.
This is displayed if the auto
focus has not been adjusted
since the testing unit power
was switched ON.
Press the [Auto Focus] button in the
dialog and start the auto focus
adjustment sequence. For details on
how to adjust the sample for auto focus
adjustment and how to load it into the
device, refer to page 3-9 in Chapter 3.
Next to the [Pneumatic Unit]
button, Sleeping is
displayed in red.
This is displayed if the
pneumatic unit is OFF.
Refer to page 14-1 in Chapter 14 and
make the pneumatic unit run.
Next to the [Replace Sheath
Liquid] button, the name of
the sheath liquid is displayed
in red and under the [Auto
focus] button, Different
sheath liquid loaded in
device is displayed in yellow.
This is displayed if the sheath
liquid selected in SOP
registration with the [Testing/
Analysis Parameters]
dialog and the sheath liquid
currently loaded in the testing
unit are different.
Replace the sheath liquid with the one
set for the SOP measurement.
Alternatively, change the measurement
conditions for the SOP settings in the
[Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog
and measure with the SOP setting list
box not set.
Table 4-1: Points to check when status is red.
TESTING
3. Test information setting
3.1 Sample information setting
Enter information on the samples, as described below.
Figure 4-5: Sample Information
1 Enter the Sample Name.
Sample names can be entered in either of the two ways below.
1) Enter the sample group name in the text box.
Up to 50 characters can be entered.
2) Click on , then select the desired sample group name from the displayed list of the latest ten
names.
2 Enter the Sample Type.
Enter the sample group type in the text box.
3 Enter the Sample Number.
Enter the sample number in the text box.
If the setting for [Sample number increment] of [System Parameters] is set to [Apply],
the last digit of sample numbers will be incremented automatically after every test. Up to 50
characters can be entered.
4 Enter Comments.
Enter comments in the text box.
TESTING
3.2 SOP setting
Set SOP, as described below. Setting SOP makes it possible to set the various measurement data in
a batch. For SOP meanings etc., refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS.
Figure 4-6: SOP Setting
1 Click , the select the SOP to use from the displayed list.
The setting items listed below are set to the content saved in the selected SOP.
- Testing Parameters
- Analysis Parameters
TESTING
3.3 Measurement condition settings
Test conditions can be set when [Edit Testing/Analysis Parameters] is checked.
Set measurement conditions, as described below.
Figure 4-7: Testing Parameters
1 Click for [Sheath Liquid], then select the sheath liquid to use from the list displayed.
2 Click for [Magnification], then select the test mode to use from the three types displayed.
HPF test mode: Testing will be conducted in the high power field (20) test mode.
Measure with a fixed analysis amount of approximately 0.35 l.
LPF test mode: Testing will be conducted in the low power field (5) test mode.
Measure with a fixed analysis amount of approximately 5.5 l.
LPFHPF test mode: When you load one sample into the sample chamber, one
measurement is made in low magnification ratio mode, then
automatically measurement is made in high magnification ratio
mode.
3 Select the count type from the two below.
Stop by Count: Testing continues until the count reaches the set value.
Up to 360,000 can be set.
Stop by time: In quantity count mode, the dispensed sample can be automatically
measured repeatedly.
Input the number of repetitions for measurement in Repeat Times.
The maximum number of repetitions is 20.
4 Set the number of automatic measurement repetitions for [Requested Number] or [Repeat
Times]. The first reagent supplied to the instrument is used for measurement.
CAUTION
When a sample of high specific gravity is tested, differences in the precipitation
speeds of particles may mean that the measurement results vary with greater
numbers of samples.
Results obtained in and after the second repetition are not guaranteed.
TESTING
NOTE: If you select [Apply] in [Testing Parameters] - [Auto Merge] on the SOP Settings
dialog, and use repeat measurement on Stop by Time method, measured records will be
merged automatically and merge recode will be generated when all repeat
measurement finished.
CAUTION
When running repeated tests, check the remaining volumes of reagents before
starting each test. If an error such as insufficient reagent occurs during a test, that
and subsequent tests will be invalid.
NOTE: How to cancel auto repeat measurement
Select [Test] [Cancel Repeat Tests].
Then the following message appears.
Figure 4-8: [Repeat Testing] dialog
Click on the [OK] button to abort auto repeat measurement.
Auto repeat measurement will stop before the measurement after next.
Also, to stop measurement immediately, select [Test] [Cancel Test].
Then the following message appears.
Figure 4-9: [Testing in progress] dialog
When you press the [OK] button, measurement is stopped immediately. (Depending on
the timing, measurement may be stopped at the start of the next measurement.)
TESTING
3.4 Analysis conditions
Analysis conditions can be set when [Edit Testing/Analysis Parameters] is checked.
Set analysis conditions, as described below.
Figure 4-10: Analysis Parameters
1 Click for [Size Parameter], then select the particle diameter to set from the list displayed.
Refer to Chapter 16, Particle diameter parameters for more information on particle diameters.
2 Click on and under [Size Parameter] to enter the lower limit and upper limit for the
diameter.
3 Click for [Shape Parameters], then select the particle form to set from the list displayed.
Refer to Chapter 16, Form parameters for more information on particle forms.
4 Click on and under [Shape Parameters] to enter the lower limit and upper limit for the
form.
5 Click on and under [Cumulative(%)] to enter the lower limit and upper limit for
cumulative frequency.
Values can also be entered directly from the keyboard.
The diameter or form for the point at which the cumulative frequency reaches the set value is
displayed.
TESTING
6 Click on and under [Dilution Ratio] to enter the ratio.
Values can also be entered directly from the keyboard.
When the dilution ratio is set, the particle density is converted to the pre-dilution value and
displayed.
3.5 Setting instrument conditions
Set instrument conditions, as described below.
Figure 4-11: Testing Parameters
CAUTION
If you click [Set Detail] button and select [Analyze] in [Testing Parameters] -
[Merge(LPF+HPF)] on the Testing Detail Parameters dialog, size parameter can
be selected from only CE diameter (number base, area base, and volume base).
After this measurement, recodes (the measurement mode of which is a
Merge(LPF+HPF)) which are from LPF measurement result recode, HPF
measurement result, and Merge(LPF+HPF) mode will be generated. refer to
Chapter 16, FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION about full range.
TESTING
1 Click on the [Set Detail] button.
The [Testing Detail Parameters] dialog appears.
Figure 4-12: [Testing Detail Parameters] dialog
2 Set the setting values as required.
Scroll the list up and down to display the item you want to change. Move the mouse to the value
field for the item you want to change, then left click. It becomes possible either to select from a list
box for that value area or to change the value directly. Here, change the item or change the value.
After the change, when you press [Close], the measurement parameter is changed.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix C for the meanings of setting values.
CAUTION
If you change a measurement condition with the Edit Testing/Analysis
Parameters check box in the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog checked,
the inside of the SOP setting selection list box in the SOP settings turns white and
SOP is deselected. If you measure in this state, measurement uses the current
settings not the existing SOP conditions. If you want to re-analyze the
measurement results with the existing SOP conditions, refer to Chapter 5,
2.5.1. Restricted analysis within rectangular range.
TESTING
4. Test procedure
4.1 Preparing a sample
When you prepare a sample, pay attention to the following.
Particle diameter
Are the particles to be tested within the testable particle-diameter range of the device
(1.5160 m)?
Specific gravity
Is the specific gravity of the particles to be tested 4 or lower?
Stability
Do the particles to be tested not melt or expand in PARTICLE SHEATH or alcohol?
Characterization of aggregation
Do the particles to be tested not aggregate beyond the testable range of the device
in PARTICLE SHEATH or alcohol?
Test starts
If aggregation occurs after aspiration, the sample gets clogged inside the
device, causing malfunction of the device.
TESTING
4.2 Testing a sample
1 After preparing the sample to test, press the [Start] button on the [Testing/Analysis
Parameters] screen.
After processing of the previous sequence is complete, the following dialog appears, and the
Testing Unit cover opens automatically.
Figure 4-14: [Measurement Sequence] dialog
CAUTION
When measuring highly adhesive particles or samples with high particle
concentrations, check to make sure that there is no carryover. Ordinary rinsing
may not be sufficient. When there is carryover, perform the automatic rinsing
sequence. (Refer to Chapter 15, Auto rinse.)
CAUTION
For safetys sake, do not open or close the cover by hand.
TESTING
2 Dispense 5 ml of the prepared sample into the testing unit sample chamber, and press the [Start]
button. The cover closes automatically, and measurement starts.
Figure 4-15: Setting the sample to be tested
3 After the test is finished, the Record List is updated to display the latest analysis results.
WARNING
Keep your hands clear of the moving cover. There is a potential to get injured.
Be careful not to touch the moving agitator. There is a potential to get injured.
TESTING
5. Display of analysis results
1 Select the [Record List] tab.
2 After selecting the record to display, select the tab for the intended display method. The test
results will be displayed.
Figure 4-16: Test Results Record List screen
In the [Record List], double click on the sample to display. The analysis results screen opens.
Figure 4-17: Analysis Results screen
Valid Count
Valid Count
TESTING
6. Shutting down (turning off the power)
1 Select [File] [Exit].
The following dialog will be displayed.
Figure 4-18: [Shutdown] dialog
2 Click on the [Yes] button.
The dialog below appears, and the shutdown process runs.
Figure 4-19: [Shutdown Sequence] dialog
3 The testing unit cover opens, so add 10 mL of RO water to the sample chamber and then click
the [OK] button.
If particle sheath is being used as the sheath liquid, after the shutdown operations end, the testing
unit cover opens, so dispense 10 ml of RO water into the sample chamber, then switch OFF the
testing unit power. If you are using a sheath liquid other than particle sheath, the testing unit
cover does not open. Also, it is not necessary to dispense the RO water.
NOTE: The effective analyzed number which is entered to the FPIA-3000 will be shown in
measurement count area per 1 second. In Stop by Time mode, count number will be
reset to 0 by repeating. However, Stop by count always indicates whole count number.
NOTE: Shut down the testing unit and the data processing section. After shutdown, the data
processing section automatically ends its program.
TESTING
4 Once the sequence is completed, the following dialog appears.
Turn off the testing unit.
When you press the [OK] button, the analysis program ends.
Figure 4-20: [Shutdown Procedure] dialog
5 Exit from Windows.
6 Turn OFF the data processing unit power switch.
7 If a sheath liquid other than particle sheath is being used, close the sheath liquid container cover
and store in the storage location. Also, dispose of waste liquid in the container.
Chapter 5 RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING
1. Record Display and Processing .................................................................. 5-1
1.1 Processing the record list ...................................................................... 5-1
1.2 Screen composition............................................................................... 5-1
1.3 Explanation of functions........................................................................ 5-2
1.4 Sort functions ........................................................................................ 5-7
1.5 The filter function................................................................................... 5-9
1.6 Search functions ................................................................................. 5-11
1.7 Display reset ....................................................................................... 5-13
1.8 Sample information revision................................................................ 5-14
1.9 Reanalyze ........................................................................................... 5-15
1.10 Deletion............................................................................................. 5-16
1.11 Merging records ................................................................................ 5-16
1.12 Copying to the clipboard ................................................................... 5-17
1.13 Changing the record display ............................................................. 5-17
2. Processing analysis results ....................................................................... 5-18
2.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-18
2.3 Moving records.................................................................................... 5-20
2.4 Thumbnail image display .................................................................... 5-21
2.5 Reanalyze ........................................................................................... 5-22
2.6 Selection particle save ........................................................................ 5-34
2.7 Changing the display of the Analysis results screen........................... 5-34
3. Particle image list ...................................................................................... 5-35
3.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-35
3.4 Detailed information display................................................................ 5-37
4. Frequency tables....................................................................................... 5-38
4.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-38
5. Multi Scattergrams .................................................................................... 5-39
5.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-39
5.3 Copying to clip board .......................................................................... 5-39
5.4 View settings....................................................................................... 5-40
5.5 Image .................................................................................................. 5-40
5.6 Image (Reference) .............................................................................. 5-40
6. Graph (Overlay-View)................................................................................ 5-40
6.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-40
7. Meta Data ..................................................................................................5-42
7.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-42
8. Detail Results.............................................................................................5-43
8.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-43
9. Graph (Trend-View) ...................................................................................5-44
9.1 Introduction..........................................................................................5-44
10. The File menu..........................................................................................5-45
10.1 File menu items .................................................................................5-45
10.2 New....................................................................................................5-46
10.3 Open..................................................................................................5-47
10.4 Import.................................................................................................5-48
10.5 Save ..................................................................................................5-50
10.6 Printing...............................................................................................5-52
10.7 PDF Print ...........................................................................................5-53
10.8 CSV export ........................................................................................5-55
10.9 Transmission to the host....................................................................5-56
RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING
1. Record Display and Processing
1.1 Processing the record list
Of the stored data displays, this section explains the [Record List] screen.
The [Record List] screen displays test result data for each record. The display is updated and
added to every time the data is reanalyzed. There is a limit of 1,000 on the number of records that
can be stored in one database.
When automatic deletion is set to [Apply] with [Settings] [System Parameters]
[System] [Record Operations], when the number of records goes over 1000, those with the
oldest measurement dates are automatically deleted.
If automatic deletion is set to [Not Apply], when the number of measurement repetitions is set in
the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog, if the sum of the measurement result records
already in the database plus the number of measurements to be made now exceeds 1000, the
Cannot measure. Exceeds maximum number of records dialog is displayed and the measurement
is not possible. In this case, delete enough records to make the new measurements possible.
1.2 Screen composition
The screen displayed when the [Record List] tab is selected is as shown below.
The [Record List] screen is displayed immediately after logon.
Figure 5-1: [Record List] screen
NOTE: Record: This is the name for a unit containing the data from one test.
Maximize button
1.3 Explanation of functions
(1) Functions of buttons on the [Record List] screen
(2) Menu > Record processing
(3) Navigation to other screens (when one record is selected)
If you left click a record with the mouse on the record list screen, that record is displayed inverted
in blue and that record is selected.
Double click on the record to display the [Analysis Results] screen. Click on a tab on the screen
to display the next screen, which will display the content of the selected record on the
corresponding screen.
Analysis Results screen
Particle Image List screen
Frequency Table screen
Meta Data screen
Detailed Results screen
Multi Scattergrams screen
Graph(Overlay-View) screen
Graph (Trend-View) screen
NOTE: When the maximize button in the FPIA-3000 window, a List screen can be displayed on
the CRT in the maximal size. When the maximize button is repressed, the display shows
the original screen.
Item Functions
Reset Display Cancels sorting and filtering settings, searches etc. and returns the screen to
the default display.
Search Search for records.
Sort Set the sorting method.
Filter Set the filtering method.
Table 5-1: [Record List] screen items
Item Functions
Select all Selects all the records.
Corresct Sample
Information
Revise sample information within the record information.
Reanalyze Select records and reanalyze them as a batch.
Delete Delete the selected record.
Merge Merge the selected record.
Table 5-2: [Record List] screen items
(4) Navigation to other screens (when multiple records are selected)
Multiple records can be selected using the mouse and keyboard. Click on multiple non-contiguous
records while holding down the Ctrl key to select them. The mouse can also be dragged across
multiple contiguous records to select them all. The selected records are highlighted in reversed
color. To cancel the selections, release the keyboard Ctrl key and select another record.
After selecting multiple records, clicking a tab on the screen, and displaying the [Analysis
Results] screen, [Particle Image list], [Frequency Table], meter data, or [Details Results]
screen, of the records selected on the record screen, the one displayed at the top is the one whose
contents are displayed. When a [Graph (Trend-View)] screen, [Multi Scattergrams] screen,
or [Graph (Overlay-View)] is displayed, the graph is drawn or the scattergram or the like
displayed using the contents of the selected records.
(5) Fixed display of column items
The column items that are always displayed on the [Record List] screen can be fixed in position.
For the procedure to set column positions, refer to Chapter 11, 1.1 View settings Record list.
(6) Selection of column display items
The column items to be displayed and hidden on the [Record List] screen can be set, as well as
their alignment. For the procedure to set column positions, refer to Chapter 11, 1.1 View settings
Record list.
(7) Change display item width
The widths of columns that are displayed on the [Record list] screen can be altered. Left click on
the column to change, and drag the pointer left and right to change to the desired width.
(8) Record data display contents
The following information is displayed in the list. The default is to display those items with o in the
default display column.
Display
contents
Detailed item Default
display
Explanation
Record
Information
Record Number O This is a unique number for each measurement result
record.
Tested O This is the date and time of the measurement.
Reanalyzed O This is the date and time of the reanalysis.
Re Analysis Checked if the data was reanalyzed.
Transmitted Checked if the record has been sent to the host.
Printed Checked if the record has been printed out.
Error Checked if an error occurred that affected the
measurement data.
External Save Checked if the record was stored externally.
Table 5-3: List Item Display Items
User
Information
Measure name O The logged-in user name at the time of the
measurement is displayed.
Re Analyzed By The logged-in user name at the time of the reanalysis
is displayed.
Sample
Information
Sample name O The name of the sample set at the time of
Sample number O The number of the sample set at the time of
Sample Type The type of the sample set at the time of
Comment The comment concerning the sample information set
at the time of measurement is displayed.
Testing
Parameters
OLens O lens information used in the measurement is
displayed.
*For details of the O lens, refer to Appendix H, HIGH/
LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL
(OPTION).
Light field
system
O Light field system information used in the
*For details of the Light filed system, refer to
Appendix J, FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL.
SOP O The SOP group name set at the time of the
Magnification O The measurement mode (LPF/HPF/LPFHPF) at the
time of measurement is displayed.
Count method O The count technique (total count/quantity count) at the
time of measurement is displayed.
Selection data
Save
Checked if this record is data saved (see 2.6
Selection particle save)
Merge data Checked if this record is merged data(see 1.11
Merging records)
Analyzed
Results
Density O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
Selected (%) O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
Small (%) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
Middle (%) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
Large (%) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
Display
contents
display
Explanation
Particles Detected (#) O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
Analyzed (#) O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
Selected (#) For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
CE Diameter (N) Statistical
analysis items (*)
O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
Circularity Statistical
analysis items (*)
O For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
CE Diameter (A) Statistical
analysis items (*)
For the contents, refer to Chapter 16, 5. List of display
items.
CE Diameter (V) Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Max. Distance Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Norm to max
dist
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Length Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Width Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Feret H
Diameter
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Feret V
Diameter
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Martin H
Diameter
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Martin V
Diameter
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Krumbein H
Diameter
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Krumbein V
Diameter
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
PE Diameter Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Area (pixels) Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Perimeter Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Display
contents
display
Explanation
Area Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Convex Hull
Perimeter
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Convex Hull
Area
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Intensity mean Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Intensity SD Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Feret Aspect
Ratio
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Area / Box Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Aspect Ratio
(W/L)
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Elongation Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Aspect Ratio
(max dist)
Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Convexity Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Solidity Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
HS Circularity Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
Major axis Statistical
analysis items (*)
items.
User-defined
item 1
For the contents, refer to Appendix C, TABLE OF
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
User-defined
item 2
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
User-defined
item 3
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
User-defined
item 4
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
User-defined
item 5
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
User-defined
item 6
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
Display
contents
display
Explanation
1.4 Sort functions
Test data can be sorted into ascending or descending order based on key parameters. To sort by a
single key, click on the [Record List] screen. To sort by multiple keys, click the [Sort] button on
the [Record List] Screen. Either method determines the sort conditions. Sorting can also be used
together with the filter function (Refer to Chapter 5, 1.5 The filter function).
Single key
Records are sorted according to one key. The operation procedure is as described below.
1 Click on the column title in the [Record List] screen that is to serve as the key.
The records are sorted.
Click again to sort in the reverse order.
Figure 5-2: Single key sort
User-defined
item 7
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
User-defined
item 8
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
User-defined
item 9
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
User-defined
item 10
SYSTEM SETTINGS.
(*) There are seven statistical analysis items: Average, mode, significant deviation, coefficient of
variation, lower value, 50% value, and upper value.
NOTE: Ascending order: 3-2-1 is reordered to 1-2-3.
Descending order: 1-2-3 is reordered to 1-2-3.
Display
contents
display
Explanation
Multiple keys
Records are sorted according to up to three keys.
1 Press the [Sort] button on the [Record List] screen.
The [Sort] dialog appears.
Figure 5-3: Multiple key sort
2 Select the basis columns from the lists for First Key Third Key.
The lists display the column items that are displayed on the [Record List] screen.
3 Select [Ascending] or [Descending] for each key.
4 Click on the [OK] button.
The records are sorted as specified.
Item Functions
Reset The items that have been set are cleared.
First key Set the columns that will be the basis of the sort when it is executed.
Second key
Third key
Ascending/
Descending
Set the order of sorting with reference to the keys that are the basis of sorting.
Table 5-4: [Sort] dialog screen items
NOTE: If Sort is set by the [Sort] button, the [Sort] button will be displayed in green color.
This sort function can be used with filter function.
1.5 The filter function
When the key item is set, this function can be used to extract and display only records which
correspond to that key item.
1 Press the [Filter] button on the [Record List] screen.
The [Filter] dialog appears.
Figure 5-4: [Filter] dialog
NOTE: When filtering is set, the [Filter] button is displayed green.
The filter function and sort function can be used in combination.
Item Detailed item Functions
Select Filters Check to use filtering.
Date Check to use the test date as a filtering condition.
Today Check to specify dates up to today corresponding with
the Windows system date.
Date Check to specify the start date and end date.
Detector and SOP Detector OLens can be selected from OLensUnit 5X, 10X and
20X. Light field system (Bright field/Dark field) is
selectable only when the OLens Unit 10X is selected.
SOP Only the registered SOP can be selectable.
Reagent name Reagent name which is set in Testing/Analysis
Parameters Dialog can be selected.
Power Field Power Field(HPF,LPF,LPF->HPF) which is set in
Testing/Analysis Parameters Dialog can be selected.
Count method Count method(Stop by count,Stop by Time) which is set
in Testing/Analysis Parameters Dialog can be selected.
Reanalysis Check to specify by the data attributes of test data.
Tested Data Check to specify test data.
Reanalyzed Data Check to specify reanalyzed test data.
Testing Status Check to specify by test status.
Normal Check to specify tests with normal samples.
Error Check to specify only samples with test errors.
Report Status Check to specify by test result.
Reported Check to specify only data for which test results have
been printed out.
Not Reported Check to specify data for which test results have not
been printed out.
Transmission
Status
Check to specify by transmission status.
Transmitted Check to specify only data for which test data have
been transmitted.
No Transmitted Check to specify test data that has not been
transmitted.
Table 5-5: Filtering function items
2 Set the conditions.
The records are extracted and displayed as specified.
1.6 Search functions
Search for any target record from among the items displayed on the [Record List] screen. Search
targets are those for which match from the first character (wild card characters cannot be used). The
search makes a distinction between single-byte and double-byte characters as the input search key.
1 Enter the search string in the [Search] field of the [Record List] screen.
Figure 5-5: Search settings
NOTE: All conditions are [AND] conditions.
Example
Test date specification: Today (Windows system date is 2004/01/01)
Detector and SOP - SOP: HPF standard
Running filtering with the above settings extracts and displays only those records for
which the measurement date is 2004/01/01 and the SOP group is HPF Standard.
2 Press the [Search] button.
If there are any matching records, the cursor moves to a highlighted item.
Figure 5-6: Search results
NOTE: If there are no matching records, the following dialog appears. Please search again.
Figure 5-7: If the search found no matching records
The cursor moves down from its present position in order, and when the cursor comes
to the bottom of the records, the cursor starts searching from the top of the records.
1.7 Display reset
This function resets sorting and filtering result displays and search settings, returning to the default
display.
1 Press the [ResetDisplay] button on the [Record List] screen.
The settings will be reset.
Figure 5-8: [ResetDisplay]
1.8 Sample information revision
The sample information can be revised for selected records.
1 Select [Menu] [Record] [Correct Sample Information].
The [Correct Sample Information] dialog will be displayed.
Figure 5-9: [Correct Sample Information] dialog
2 Set the items.
3 Click on the [Correct] button.
The [Confirm Sample Information] dialog will be displayed.
Figure 5-10: [Confirm Sample Information] dialog
4 Click on the [Yes] button.
The record sample information is corrected.
NOTE: The [Correct Sample Information] dialog can also be called by right clicking on the
record on the [Record List] screen, and selecting [Correct Sample Information] from
the context menu.
Item Functions
Sample Name Select the registered sample name.
Sample Number Enter the sample No.
Sample Type Enter the sample group type.
Comments Enter a comment.
[Cancel] button Stops the processing and returns.
Table 5-6: [Correct Sample Information] dialog items
CAUTION
Do not use the symbol of / or \ for the sample name, sample number and sample
type.
1.9 Reanalyze
Selected records can be reanalyzed in a batch.
1 Select [Menu] [Record] [Reanalyze].
The [Analysis] dialog will be displayed.
Figure 5-11: [Analysis] Dialog
2 Select the above item. Press the[Analyze] button.
A dialog is displayed to confirm that you want to execute reanalysis. To execute, press
[Analyze]; to cancel, press [Cancel].
When you press [Analyze], the specified data is reanalyzed in one batch.
NOTE: The [Analysis] dialog can also be called by right clicking on the record on the [Record
List] screen, and selecting [Analyze] from the context menu.
Item Functions
Combo box The data can be changed to a registered SOP.
Save New
(Radio button)
Select if the reanalyzed data is to be saved as new test data when the
reanalysis is conducted.
Save (Radio button) Select if the reanalyzed data is to be saved by overwriting when the reanalysis
is conducted.
Table 5-7: [Analysis] dialog screen items
1.10 Deletion
Selected records can be deleted. Select beforehand any records you want to delete.
1 Select [Menu] [Record] [Delete].
The [Deletion of Selected Data] dialog will appear for the selected data.
Figure 5-12: [Deletion of Selected Data] dialog
The selected data is deleted. Press the [Cancel] button to stop processing and return.
1.11 Merging records
You can merge multiple records.
1 On the [Record List] screen, select the records for analysis.
2 Select the [Record] -> [Merge] or right-click on the recode list and select merge.
Figure 5-13: [Setting Sample Information] dialog
NOTE: The [Deletion of Selected Data] dialog can also be called by right clicking on a record
on the [Record List] screen, and selecting [Delete] from the context menu.
Item Functions
Sample Name Select a previously registered sample name or enter a new sample name.
Sample Number Enter the sample No.
When you input the numeric value, it is counted up each time there is a
measurement.
Table 5-8: Merge settings
3 Set the items.
The records are merged with the set content.
Press the [Cancel] button to stop processing and return.
1.12 Copying to the clipboard
Selected records can be copied to the clipboard. Records copied to the clipboard can be pasted into
other application software. String names can also be copied to the clipboard, as record headers.
1 Right click on a record in the [Record List] screen, then select [Copy to clipboard] from the
context menu.
The record is copied to the clipboard.
1.13 Changing the record display
The items displayed in the record list can be changed. For details, refer to Chapter 11, 1.1 View
settings Record list.
Sample Type Enter the sample group type information.
Comments Enter a comment.
CAUTION
Data from different Power Field (LPF/HPF) cannot be merged.
LPFHPF (HPF) and HPF are handled as the same mode and LPFHPF (LPF)
and LPF are handled as the same mode.
Data with different Count method (total mode/quantity count mode) cannot be
merged.
Data reanalyzed from a record cannot be merged with the original record.
NOTE: You can merge select [Menu]-[Recode]-[Merge] after you get analysis result by
selecting multiple recodes in record list.
NOTE: Clipboard: An area in main memory (within the PC) used for temporary storage of data.
Item Functions
Table 5-8: Merge settings
2. Processing analysis results
2.1 Introduction
This section explains the [Analysis Results] screen.
The [Analysis Results] screen displays analysis results for each record that was selected on the
[Record list] screen. If multiple records are selected, analysis results are displayed for the
uppermost of the records selected on the [Record List] screen.
Figure 5-14: [Analysis Results] screen
Sample Information
Restricted analysis range
change combo box
Record
selection
Scattergram Test value display area
Particle diameter
Histogram
[Particle diameter
selection] button
[Image] button [Save] button
[Reanalyze] button
[Particle form
selection] button
Particle form histogram
Item Functions
Record selection If multiple records are selected, the records are moved.
Sample Information The sample information for the selected record is displayed.
[Image] button The particle images for the selected record are displayed.
[Particle diameter
(X axis) selection] button
The particle diameter (X axis) for the selected record is selected.
Particle diameter
(X axis) Histogram
Displays a histogram with the X axis parameter restricted.
[Reanalyze] button Reanalyze the selected record.
[Cancel] button Cancels the reanalysis. Enabled during reanalysis.
[Save] button The reanalyzed data New / Replace and Selection particle Save dialog
open. You can save various data here.
Restricted analysis range
change combo box
You can change the range for restricted analysis by changing the combo
box for specifying the restricted analysis range.
[Particle form
(Y axis) selection] button
The particle form (Y axis) for the selected record is selected.
Particle form
(Y axis) histogram
Displays a histogram with the Y axis parameter restricted.
Scattergram Display restricted analysis Scattergram.
Test value display area The test values for the selected record are displayed.When you press the
standard tab, analysis data and particle form date for the normal particle
diameter is displayed. Also, if you press the user defined tab, the user
defined data registered with [Settings] [SOP] is displayed. For details on
how to set user definitions, refer to Appendix C, 2. Table of SOP settings.
When you press the Cumulative Frequency tab, the Cumulative Frequency
(X axis) is displayed by 10%. When you right click on the test value display
area, "Copy to clip board" or "View Settings (Result list)" can be selected
and done. If the "View Settings (Result list)" is displayed, you can change
the location of the result list parameter display. For details, refer to Chapter
11, 1.3 View settings Result (List).
Table 5-9: Analysis results screen items
NOTE: User Information items are a function that registers formulas using measured analysis
parameters selected by the user and adds the results of calculating the formula to the
measurement record. For further details, refer to Appendix C, 2. Table of SOP settings.
CAUTION
In the Merge(LPF+HPF) mode, the [Image] button on the Analysis Results
Screen is disabled. (Image display function is not provided.) Furthermore, the
effective analyzed number and the selected number are not displayed.
When the analysis results of the data in the Merge(LPF+HPF) mode are
displayed, the particle image list tab, the Merge(LPF+HPF) tab and images
during multi scattergram cannot be displayed. Also, the particle images cannot
be printed out.
For details of the Merge(LPF+HPF) mode, refer to Chapter 16, FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION.
2.3 Moving records
When multiple records are selected on the [Record List] screen, the displayed records can be
moved.
Figure 5-15: Record move buttons
Item Functions
Display the analysis results for the first record in the list.
Display the analysis results for the record one above the current record.
Display the analysis results for the record one below the current record.
Display the analysis results for the last record in the list.
Table 5-10: Record move button items
NOTE: For each items, refer to Table 5-3 List Item Display Items.
2.4 Thumbnail image display
Press the [Image] button in the [Analysis Results] screen to display the images in the analysis
limit range in the [Particle Image Thumbnails] screen.
Changing the analysis limit conditions in the [Analysis Results] screen refreshes the content of
the thumbnail screen at the same time.
Press the button to minimize the image thumbnail window to an icon.
Press the button to maximize the image thumbnail window.
Press the button to close the window.
Figure 5-16: [Particle Image Thumbnails] dialog
2.5 Reanalyze
You can reanalyze the measurement results with the method below by pressing the [Reanalyze]
button on the [Analysis Results] screen to open the reanalysis screen.
At the right of Figure 5-17 Reanalysis screen, there are the standard tab and enhancing 1-5 tabs.
If you press one of the buttons, following analysis can be done separately.
You can change the limit axes (X axis, Y axis), which are analysis parameters, and reanalyze.
You can restrict the limit axis (X axis, Y axis) analysis range to any area you desire and reanalyze.
You can change the cumulative frequencies for the lower value and upper value of the analysis
results to any desire values and reanalyze.
With the standard button, you can use the mouse to move the restriction area axes (X axis and Y
axis) for the restricted axis particle distribution histogram to specify a rectangular area within the
scattergram and execute an analysis restricted to within that rectangular range. For the concrete
procedure, refer to Chapter 5, 2.5.1. Restricted analysis within rectangular range. Also, the results
of this analysis are saved in the measurement record.
With enhancing analyses 1-5, in addition to analysis restricted to a range, you can analyze restricted
to a polygon range by specify the polygon range within the scattergram and executing the restricted
analysis. For the concrete procedure, refer to Chapter 5, 2.5.2. Polygon range limit analysis.
By selecting a registered SOP, you can reanalyze with the analysis conditions set for that SOP.
You can register any analysis conditions you want as a new SOP. This means that you can
measure next time under the same conditions if you use prior SOP.
2.5.1. Restricted analysis within rectangular range
The [Reanalyze] button on the [Analysis Results] screen can be used to reanalyze test results.
Press the [Cancel] button to interrupt the reanalysis.
You can analysis with various items by pressing the standard button or one of the expansion
buttons, 1-5, in the figure.
NOTE: Polygon range limit analysis is selected by default only Exhancing 5, Reconfigure in
Detailed Settings if necessary. For details, see Appendix C, TABLE OF SYSTEM
SETTINGS.
Figure 5-17: Reanalysis screen
Item Functions
[Image] button Image thumbnails of the selected records can be displayed.
[Cancel] button Cancel the analysis.
[Make New SOP] button A new SOP can be made.
[Clear Area] button The preset SOP information area can be cleared.
[Detailed Settings] button The detailed information on the selected SOP can be displayed.
Table 5-11: Functions of reanalysis buttons
CAUTION
When you press the tab button such as Record List without pressing the
Cancel button while the analysis is executed, the analyzed data storage dialog
will be displayed. The reanalyzed data is not saved. Update? appears. Note that
the reanalyzed data is not saved and the display goes to each tab screen if you
press the [NO] button here.
If you press the [YES] button here, the reanalyzed data will be saved and the
display goes to each tab screen.
X-axis particle distribution histogram
Y-axis particle distribution histogram Scattergram display Standard and Analysis 1 5 buttons
1) Limit axis (X, Y axis) change and lower (%) value and upper (%) value change
Records can be reanalyzed by pressing the [Reanalyze] button on the [Analysis Results]
screen. Changing the value of the list box of limit axes (X and Y axes) reanalyzes with the
applicable analysis parameters and displays the results.
The limit axis information can be set separately between standard analysis and enhancing analysis 1-5.
By dragging the left side or right side vertical axis of the X-axis particle distribution graph (left
clicking the mouse and moving it) you can move the area limit axes and can limit the range of the
area. (By default, the area outside the limits is grayed out.) The particles inside the area are subject
to analysis.
By dragging the top side or bottom side horizontal axis of the Y-axis particle distribution graph (left
clicking the mouse and moving it), you can move the area limit axes and can limit the range of the
area. (By default, the area outside the limits is grayed out.) The particles inside the area are subject
to analysis.
At this time, the values inside the limited analysis range change combo box change to show the
position of the area limit axes.
You can also change the area limit axis by changing the values in this combo box. In this case, the
limit axis is moved automatically.
Figure 5-18: Limit axis parameter change list box
Limit axis parameter change list box (for X axis)
Limit axis parameter change list box (for Y axis) Restricted analysis range change
combo box
There are items for changing the lower (%) and upper (%) in the particle diameter limit and form
limit columns in the analysis conditions frame.
You can either change value with the buttons or input the new value directly into the edit box.
For explanations of lower (%) and upper (%), refer to Chapter 16, 5.4 Statistical analysis items.
Figure 5-19: Particle Diameter Limit (Size:) and Shape Limit (Shape:) Upper (%) and
Lower (%) Change Box
2) Change the SOP conditions, then save the analysis results by overwriting or saving as a
new file.
There are three methods for reanalysis.
1) Reanalyze with the existing SOP, then save the analysis results by overwriting or saving as a new
file.
2) Register new SOP conditions, then save the analysis results by overwriting or saving as a new
file.
3) Revise the existing SOP conditions, then carry out analysis.
(1) Reanalyze with the existing SOP, then save the analysis results by overwriting or saving
as a new file.
1 On the [Record List] screen, select the records for reanalysis.
2 Press the [Analysis Results] tab.
3 Click on the [Reanalyze] button.
The following screen will be displayed.
Figure 5-20: Previously registered SOP selection list box
4 Select existing SOP conditions from [SOP].
Analysis results are reanalyzed under the selected SOP conditions, and the results are displayed.
5 New save: Press the [Save] button.
The [Data storage] dialog is displayed as in the figure below.
Figure 5-21: [Data storage] dialog
6 Select the [New Save], and then press the [Save] button.
The [Setting Sample Information] dialog is displayed as in the figure below.
Figure 5-22: [Setting Sample information] dialog
Input the sample information according to 1.8 Sample information revision.
The reanalyzed data is saved as a new record.
Figure 5-23: [Reanalyzed Data Update] dialog
Reanalyzed date is displayed in the [ReAnalyzed] field for the sample information within the
analysis results.
The logged-on user name is entered in the [Reanalyzed By] field.
Figure 5-24: Sample information
8 Update:After completing 4, press the [Save] button. The dialog shown in Figure 5-21 will be
displayed.
9 Select Update and press the [Save] button.
Figure 5-25: [Reanalyzed Data Update] dialog
10Click on the [OK] button.
The analysis results data that have been newly selected and reanalyzed according to the SOP
conditions are saved to the same record.
(2) The data is analyzed according to the new SOP, and the new SOP is registered, then the
analysis results are saved by overwriting or saving as a new file.
1 On the [Record List] screen, select the records for analysis.
2 Press the [Analysis Results] tab. Press the [Reanalyze] button.
3 Change analysis conditions, such as particle size distribution limits.
[SOP] under [Analysis Parameters] turns white.
Figure 5-26: SOP selection area
4 To make more detailed alterations to the SOP, click on the [Detailed Settings] button under
[Analysis Parameters].
Figure 5-27: [Setting Analysis Parameters] dialog
If you place a check in the Particle Analysis checkbox, it also becomes possible to change the
particle analysis parameters. For details on the parameters, refer to Appendix C, 2. Table of SOP
settings.
5 Set the items.
6 After changing the SOP parameters, click on the [Make New SOP] button.
Figure 5-28: [new SOP registration] dialog
7 Enter the SOP name for new registration, then click on the [OK] button.
Figure 5-29: [Registration of New SOP] dialog
Reanalysis will be carried out with the new SOP, and the newly-registered SOP conditions will
appear in the SOP list box.
Figure 5-30: Display of Analysis Parameters after SOP registration
When you press the [Save] button to open the data storage dialog, select Update or New and press
the [Save] button, the reanalyzed results are saved.
NOTE: This dialog can be used to set the particle analysis conditions, statistical analysis
conditions and limit analysis conditions that are required for the analysis process. The
SOP for test conditions etc. can be changed to other SOP conditions using [Settings]
[SOP settings]. However, these parameters will not have any impact on the analysis.
NOTE: You can save the changed reanalysis conditions or create new records without setting
an SOP. In that case, the SOP list box is blank.
2.5.2. Polygon range limit analysis
This section explains the Extend 5, set to the polygon analysis, as an example.
The [Reanalyze] button on the [Analysis Results] screen can be used to reanalyze test results.
Press the [Cancel] button to interrupt the reanalysis.
You can conduct an expanded analysis by pressing the [Ex 5] button in the figure.
When you press the [Ex 5] button, the figure below is displayed.
Figure 5-31: Analysis limited to polygon range
Specifying the polygon range:
You can draw a straight line as in the figure below by moving the mouse within the scattergram
(A), left clicking, moving the mouse, then left clicking again.
Figure 5-32: Specifying the range with the mouse
(A) Analysis result display area
Clear
Area
When you right click the mouse, the display becomes like Figure 5-33 and you can create a
closed polygon.
Figure 5-33: Creating a polygon with the mouse
Particles surrunded by the polygon are analysed as limited particles, and the result is displayed
in the following result list.
Users can specify the range by the polygon with 15 points.
Figure 5-34: Polygon analysis results list
The polygon vertex clicked with the mouse in the polygon position information is displayed in
the format (X, Y).
Revising the polygon:
To cancel the entire area of the set polygon, press the [ClearArea] button. All the polygon
limit data is cleared.
If you want to revise the polygon range, click the mouse on a vertex. The vertex becomes a
square, as in Figure 5-35.
Display area of analysis
results
Polygon position
information
Figure 5-35: Selecting a polygon range vertex
Bring the mouse to the vertex that has become a square and while holding down the left mouse
button at that location, move the mouse to move the vertex as in Figure 5-36.
Figure 5-36: Moving a polygon range vertex
Each time the polygon range is changed, the statistics are analyzed and the results are displayed in
the analysis results display area.
CAUTION
While the analysis is executed, press the Multi Scattergram tab, the Graph
(Overlay-View) tab, Graph (Trend-View) tab or the Record list tab without
pressing the [Cancel] button. Then, the analyzed data storage dialog will be
displayed. The reanalyzed data is not saved. Update? appears. Note that the
reanalyzed data is not saved and the display goes to each tab screen if you press
the [NO] button here.
If you press the [YES] button here, the reanalyzed data wil be saved and the
display goes to each tab screen.
Moving the vertex to the right
2.6 Selection particle save
After analysis is performed in the particle image list window, the results about the particles of the
marked particle image can be stored.
Press the [Save] button on the analysis result screen.
Figure 5-37: [Data storage] dialog
When you select the [Selection particle Save] from this dialog, the selection particle list box is
enabled and you can select among All selection particles, Marked particles and No marked particles
to store.
When you select an item and press the [Save] button, the particles to be stored will be reanalyzed
and its results will be stored in the new record.
2.7 Changing the display of the Analysis results screen
The display colors on the Analysis results screen can be changed. For details, refer to Chapter 11,
1.2 View settings Result (Graph).
Item Function
All selection particles All particles in the area can be stored.
Marked particles The selected particles with mark selected in the particle image list can be
stored.
No marked particles The selected particles other than the ones with mark selected in the particle
image list can be stored.
Table 5-12: [Data storage] dialog items
3. Particle image list
3.1 Introduction
This section explains the [Particle Image List] screen.
The [Particle Image List] screen can display the particle images for the test data selected from
the [Records List] screen.
Figure 5-38: [Particle Image List] screen
Item Functions
Sort This function sorts and displays image data.
Particle Size The displayed size of the images can be altered. Images can be listed at full
size, 2, 4, 8 and 10.
Display Param: Do not display: Particle images are displayed without parameters. Limiting
parameters: The limit axis parameters are displayed under each particle image.
Table 5-13: [Particle Image List] screen items
Figure 5-39: Parameter display screen
Right click the image list display to copy images to the clipboard.
Figure 5-40: Popup menu in the [Particle Image List] screen
Mark limitation When you select an item among No limitation (images are displayed
regardless of the marks), Mark display (only the marked images are displayed)
and Display outside mark (images without marks are displayed), you can
display the selected type screen.
When a particle image is clicked on, the border of the image turns red
(marked). Click again reverts to the previous color. The marked particle is
displayed marked in the Multi Scattergram screen display of the [Analysis
Results] screen.The information about Marking is saved in the Record.
Boundaryline The particle image data can be displayed as outlines
Item Functions
Copy To Clipboard
(1 Particle)
Copy particle images for single particles to the clipboard.
Copy To Clipboard (1 page) Copy all displayed particle images to the clipboard.
Detail Information Display detailed information on the corresponding particles on the
screen.
Table 5-14: [Particle Image List] screen pop-up menu items
Item Functions
Table 5-13: [Particle Image List] screen items
Displays parameters of each axis
3.4 Detailed information display
Detailed particle data can be displayed.
1 Right click on one particle in the Particle Image List screen, then select [Detail Information]
from the context menu.
Figure 5-41: [Particle Image Clip] dialog
Item Functions
Detailed data list The detailed data for the selected particle are displayed.
Particle image Displays the particle image.
[Image] radio button Select to save and copy data in bitmap form.
[List] radio button Select to save and copy data in CSV form.
[Save] button Save with the above settings.
[Copy] button Copy to the clipboard with the above settings.
[Close] button Close the dialog.
Table 5-15: [Particle Image Clip] dialog items
4. Frequency tables
4.1 Introduction
This section explains the [Frequency Table] screen.
The [Frequency Table] screen can be used to display frequency tables for the records selected
on the [Record List] screen. The frequency table list on the X-axis limited range, the frequency
table list on the Y-axis limited range, and the scatter frequency table with limits are displayed.
Figure 5-42: [Frequency Table] screen
The displayed frequency table data can be copied to the clipboard.
1 Right click on a frequency table, then select [Copy To The Clipboard] from the context
menu. The data is copied to the clipboard.
5. Multi Scattergrams
5.1 Introduction
This section explains the [Multi Scattergrams] screen.
The [Multi Scattergrams] screen can display the scattergrams for up to eight records selected on
the Record List screen.
This is a useful application for looking at the change in time of the scattergram for the same
particles.
Figure 5-43: [Multi Scattergrams] screen
5.3 Copying to clip board
You can copy the data to clip board.
1 Right click on the Multi Scattergram screen and select Copy to clip board in the displayed menu.
The Multi Scattergram will be copied to the clip board.
CAUTION
This cannot be executed during reanalysis.
5.4 View settings
Right click on the Multi Scattergram screen. Select View Settings(Result Graph) from the
displayed menu. You can do view settings in the Multi Scattergram screen. For details, refer to
Chapter 11, DISPLAY SETUP.
5.5 Image
Click an optional scatter in the Multi Scattergram screen and right click to display the menu. Select
Image from the displayed menu.
The corresponding scatter records are displayed as thumbnails.
Furthermore, if you double click an optional scatter, the image thumbnails will be displayed as
above.
5.6 Image (Reference)
Click an optional scatter in the Multi Scattergram screen and right click to display the menu. Select
Image (Reference) from the displayed menu.
The corresponding scatter records are displayed as thumbnails.
6. Graph (Overlay-View)
6.1 Introduction
This section explains the [Graph(Overlay-View)] screen.
The [Graph (Overlay-View)] screen can display the particle diameter parameters and particle
form parameters for up to ten records selected on the [Record List] screen.
This displays an overlay graph of the frequency distribution with the X-axis limited, the cumulative
distribution, and the frequency distribution with the Y-axis limited. This is effective for looking at
particle differences.
NOTE: Clip board is an area on the main memory (inside the PC) where data is temporarily
stored.
CAUTION
For the image thumbnails of the Multi Scattergram, one image window and one
image (reference) window, or total 2 windows can be displayed. You cannot
display one scatter as the image and image (reference).
Figure 5-44: [Graph(Overlay-View)] screen
The frequency distribution graphs on the [Graph(Overlay-View)] screen can be copied to the
clipboard.
1 Right click on a record in the [Graph(Overlay-View)] screen, then select [Copy To The
Clipboard] from the context menu. The frequency distribution graph is copied to the clipboard.
6.4 Setting up display
Right click on the screen and select Graph (Overlay-View) from the displayed menu. You can set
the indications of the graph (overlay-view) screen. For details, refer to Chapter 11, DISPLAY
SETUP.
CAUTION
This cannot be executed if the X-axis and Y-axis limit parameters differ among the
selected records.
7. Meta Data
7.1 Introduction
This section explains the [Meta Data] screen.
The [Meta Data] screen can display sample information, test conditions and analysis conditions
for the records selected on the [Record List] screen.
Figure 5-45: [Meta Data] screen
The data items on the [Meta Data] screen can be copied to the clipboard.
1 Right click on the [Meta Data] screen, then select [Copy To The Clipboard] from the
context menu.
The data is copied to the clipboard.
8. Detail Results
8.1 Introduction
This section explains the [Detail Results] screen.
On the [Detail Results] screen, the analysis results, the sample information, the particle diameter
parameters analyzed statistically, and the particle form parameters analyzed statically for the
records selected on the [Record List] screen can be displayed.
The parameters selected as a limit axes display statistical analysis items restricted, and the others
display the items not restricted.
Figure 5-46: [Detail Results] screen
The data items on the [Detail Results] screen can be copied to the clipboard.
1 Right click on the [Detail Results] screen, then select [Copy To The Clipboard] from the
context menu.
The data is copied to the clipboard.
9. Graph (Trend-View)
9.1 Introduction
This section explains the [Graph(Trend-View)] screen.
The [Graph(Trend-View)] screen can display average values, mode values, 50% value, lower
value, upper value, standard deviation, and coefficient of variation can be displayed. This is
effective for looking at the change in each record with the parameters.
For the meanings of parameters, refer to Chapter 16, 5.4 Statistical analysis items.
Figure 5-47: [Graph(Trend-View)] screen
1 Select the records to display by dragging on the [Record List] screen.
2 Press the [Graph (Trend-View)] tab on the [Record List] screen.
Data (average, mode, 50% value, lower value, upper value, SD (standard deviation), and CV
(coefficient of variation) on the limit particle parameters are displayed for the specified records.
The data items on the [Graph(Trend-View)] screen can be copied to the clipboard.
1 Right click on the [Graph(Trend-View)] screen, then select [Copy ToThe Clipboard] from
the context menu. The data is copied to the clipboard.
9.4 Setting up display
Right click on the screen and select Graph (Trend-View) from the displayed menu. You can set the
indications of the graph (trend-view) screen. For details, refer to Chapter 11, DISPLAY SETUP.
10. The File menu
10.1 File menu items
This section explains the [File] menu.
Available menu items when the [File] menu is selected are listed below.
Figure 5-48: [File] menu
CAUTION
This cannot be executed if the X-axis and Y-axis limit parameters differ among the
selected records.
10.2 New
A new database can be created.
1 Select [Menu] [File] [New].
The following dialog screen will be displayed.
Figure 5-49: [Browse For Folder] dialog
2 Move to the directory in the folder displayed area where you want to create a new database and
press the [Make New Folder] button. A folder named [New Folder] will be created. Right
click on the new folder in the folder displayed area and select [Name change] from the
displayed menu. The folder name changing menu will be displayed. Then, change the name of
the [New Folder] and press the [OK] button. You can create the new database. When you press
the [Cancel] button, the process will be canceled.
Figure 5-50: Warning dialog when there are files in the folder
NOTE: Database: An area for the centralized management of data.
CAUTION
When creating a database, if there is already a database in that folder, the
screen below is displayed and the database is not created.
Only one database can be stored in each folder.
10.3 Open
Open an existing database.
1 Select [Menu] [File] [Open].
Figure 5-51: [Open] dialog
2 Set the above items and click on the [Open] button.
An existing database opens.
If the selected database does not exist, the following dialog appears. Check the database save
directory and database name.
Figure 5-52: Open Confirmation dialog
Item Functions
Look in Select the directory where the database is stored.
File name Enter the database name.
Files of type Check that file type is set to record book file (*.rbk).
Table 5-16: [Open] dialog items
10.4 Import
The other database information can be imported in the current opening database.
1 Select [Menu] - [Import]. The following dialog will be displayed.
Figure 5-53: [Open]dialog
2 Select the database you want to import and press the [Open] button. Then, the data importing
dialog will be displayed.
Figure 5-54: [Import Data]dialog
3 Select the record you want to import and press the [Import] button. then the measured data
stored in the FPIA-3000 can be imported.
Item Function
Reset Display Reset the sort filter result display or the search setting and return the display to
the default.
Search Search the record including the data you want to search in the selected
records.For the searching procedure, refer to 1.6 Search functions.
Select All Select all records in the selected database.
Sort The record information can be rearranged according to the sort items and
displayed.For the operation procedure, refer to 1.4 Sort functions.
Filter The record which is applicable for the key item can be extracted by setting the
key item.For the operation procedure, refer to 1.5 The filter function.
Import Import the extracted record information to the FPIA-3000.
Table 5-17: [Open] dialog items
10.5 Save
Test data can be made into a new database.
All data can be saved, or only the selected data.
1) All Data
All data displayed on the [Record List] screen can be saved as a new database.
1 Select [Menu] [File] [Save] [All data].
press the [Make New Folder] button. A folder named [New Folder] will be created. Right
The dialog below appears if data of the same name exists in the same directory. Change the save
location or the file name.
The dialog below is also displayed if there are files in the directory in which you want to create the
database. Empty the directory.
Figure 5-56: Save Confirmation dialog
2) Selected data
Data selected on the [Record List] screen can be saved as a new database.
1 Select [Menu] [File] [Save] [Selected Data].
press the [Move New Folder] button. A folder named [New Folder] will be created. Right
The dialog below appears if data of the same name exists in the same directory. Change the Save
in or the File name.
Figure 5-58: Save Confirmation dialog
10.6 Printing
Prints the data.
1 Select [Menu] [File] [Print].
The following dialog screen will be displayed. After placing a check in the checkbox for the item
you want to print and selecting the print format from the list box, press the [Print] button. The
data for the records selected from the record list are printed according to the print format. Press
the [Cancel] button to return.
Figure 5-59: [Print] dialog
Item Item Functions
Testing Results Record List Select to print the record list.
Analysis Results Select to print the analysis results.
Particle Image Select to print image data.
Graph (Trend-View) Select to print the graph (trend).
Multi Scattergrams Select to print the Multi Scattergrams.
Graph(Overlay-View) Select to print the Graph(Overlay-View).
Frequency Size Frequency Select to print the particle diameter frequency tables.
Shape Frequency Select to print the particle form frequency tables.
User definition Select to print a table defined by the user.
[Analysis]
check button
Analysis result data selection Place a checkmark in the check box to print out the
corresponding analysis result in printing.
[Format
Settings] button
The format to be used for printing can be set.
Table 5-18: [Print] dialog items
10.7 PDF Print
1 Select [Menu] - [File] - [PDF Print].
Figure 5-60: [PDF Print] dialog
The dialog shown in Figure 5-60 appears. Place check-marks at the appropriate items to be printed
and select a print format from the list box, and click the [PDF] button to output the selected records
in the [Record List] screen to the PDF file. Click the [Cancel] button to restore.
NOTE: Click on the [Format Settings] button to set the desired print format. For details, refer to
Chapter 12, PRINT FORMAT.
CAUTION
1. By default, one page of analysis results is printed. The beginning section of the
image display is printed at the bottom of the analysis results print sheet. To
print the rest of the image, set the number of pages in the format settings. For
details, see Chapter 12, PRINT FORMAT.
2. By default, one page of image data is printed. To print the rest of the image, set
the number of pages in the format settings. For details, refer to Chapter 12,
PRINT FORMAT.
CAUTION
When printing is executed from the FPIA-3000 application, if an equipment error
or the like occurs in the printing, an error message is displayed from the printer
manufacturers driver installed in Windows. Check the printer manufacturer's
users manual and eliminate the error.
(a)
Enter the file name at the place (a) in the PDF Print dialog. It is also possible to select a file in the
edit box and change the file name.
NOTE: The PDF(which is abbreviated to Portable Document Format) which is developed by
Adobe Systems is a electronic document to be used to exchange the electronic
document through the Internet.
Item Item Functions
Testing Results Record List Select to output the record list to the PDF file.
Analysis Results Select to output the analysis results to the PDF file.
Particle Image Select to output the image data to the PDF file. (Note 1)
Graph (Trend-View) Select to output the Graph (Trend-View) to the PDF
file. (Note 2)
Multi Scattergrams Select to output the Multi Scattergrams to the PDF file.
Graph (Overlay-
View)
Select to output the Graph (Overlay-View) to the PDF
file.
Frequency Size Frequency Select to output the particle diameter frequency table to
the PDF file.
Shape Frequency Select to output the particle form frequency table to the
PDF file.
User defined Select to output to the PDF file in a format defined by
user.
[Analysis] check
button
Analysis result data
selection
Place a checkmark in the check box to print out the
corresponding analysis result in printing as PDF data.
[Format Settings]
button
The format to be used for printing can be set.
[Change] button Changing the output
path
Click the [Change] button to display the Windows File/
Folder dialog. Select a desired folder in which file is
saved.
Table 5-19: [PDF Print] dialog items
CAUTION
In the default setting, one sheet of the analysis results is output to the PDF file.
In the lower part of the analysis results PDF file, the first part of the image
display will be output to the PDF file. To output the rest of the image to the PDF
file, set the number of prints in the format settings. For details, see Chapter 12,
PRINT FORMAT.
In the default setting, one sheet of the image data is output to the PDF file. To
output the rest of the image to the PDF file, set the number of prints in the
format settings. For details, see Chapter 12, PRINT FORMAT.
CAUTION
When the FPIA-3000 is set to Merge(LPF+HPF) mode, images cannot be
printed even if you try to print the analysis data and particle image data.
For details of Merge(LPF+HPF) mode, refer to Chapter 16, FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, and for the details of the Merge(LPF+HPF) setting, refer to
Appendix C, TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS.
10.8 CSV export
Data can be exported in CSV file format.
1 Select [Menu] [File] [CSV].
Figure 5-61: [Export CSV] dialog
NOTE: CSV format: A file format in which data items are separated by commas ,. CSV files
can be read by compatible applications (The standard WordPad provided with
Windows, MS Office Excel and others).
Export: The output of data converted for compatibility so that it can be used by other
applications.
Contents of Output Functions
Record List Check here to export the list of records, then enter the export file name.
Size Frequency Check here to export the particle diameter and frequency, then enter the
export file name. The Sample Name, Sample Number, and Record
Number are added to the file name.
Shape Frequency Check here to export the particle form frequency table, then enter the
export file name. The Sample name, Sample Number, and Record
Number are added to the file name.
Scattergram Check here to export the scattergram data, then enter the export file
name. The Sample name, Sample No., and Record No. are added
to the file name.
Output Path The destination directory for the CSV file export can be specified. Follow
standard Windows operating procedure to set the path.
Analysis If you press the check bottun, you can output default analysis result and
results of the enhancing 1 to 5 as CSV format.
Table 5-20: [Export CSV] dialog items
10.9 Transmission to the host
Export all data from the record list, or all selected data, to the host.
1 Select [Menu] [File] [Data Transmission].
Figure 5-62: [Host Transmission] dialog
For the contents of the information sent, refer to Appendix D, 4. Data format.
Change Set the destination directory for the CSV file export.
Export CSV Export data in CSV file format.
Cancel Close the screen.
Item Functions
Output Select RS-232C or LAN.
Transmit Execute transmission.
Cancel Close the dialog.
Table 5-21: [Host Transmission] dialog items
CAUTION
If the host is not connected to the data processing section of the FPIA-3000 or the
transmission conditions are not appropriate, if data is transmitted to the host,
Transmission error is displayed in the [Host Transmission] dialog. Either check
the transmission condition settings in Chapter 9, SYSTEM SETUP or check that
the connection cable is connected correctly.
Contents of Output Functions
Table 5-20: [Export CSV] dialog items
Chapter 6 QUALITY CONTROL
1. Quality control ............................................................................................. 6-1
1.1 Overview of quality control .................................................................... 6-1
1.2 File Settings .......................................................................................... 6-2
1.3 Adding a quality control file ................................................................... 6-3
1.4 Deleting a quality control file ................................................................. 6-5
1.5 Target setting ........................................................................................ 6-6
1.6 Auto target............................................................................................. 6-6
1.7 Deleting a quality control data............................................................... 6-7
QUALITY CONTROL
1. Quality control
1.1 Overview of quality control
The state of the instrument can be monitored by regularly measuring parameters, such as the
average diameter of latex particles, and observing time series data.
The screen below is displayed via [Maintenance] [Quality Control]. The target parameter can
be managed as a time series and displayed.
Figure 6-1: [QC Chart] screen
Item Explanation
File Settings Create a new QC data file or remove a QC data file.
Delete Delete QC data.
CSV Save the displayed QC data as CSV data in the file.
When the [CSV] button is pressed, QC Save As dialog will be displayed. Input
the file name and store the CSV file. (The extension should be .csv.)
Print Print the displayed QC data.
When the [Print] button is pressed, Windows-based standard print dialog will
open. Perform printer settings if necessary, and print the data.
Close Close the QC chart screen.
Table 6-1: [QC Chart] screen
QUALITY CONTROL
1.2 File Settings
Create a new QC data file or remove a QC data file.
1 Press the [File Settings] button in the QC chart dialog.
Figure 6-2: [File Settings] dialog
Item Explanation
NewFile Create a new QC data file.
Delete Remove the selected QC data file.
Target Limit Settings Edit control limit value information on the selected quality control data.
Auto Target Set control limit value information on the selected quality control data,
according to the SD.
Table 6-2: Edit QC Data items
QUALITY CONTROL
1.3 Adding a quality control file
Add new quality control files from the [QC Chart] screen.
1 Register an SOP for particles subject to quality control, then run tests at regular intervals (such
as once every morning). (For details on the SOP registration method, refer to Chapter 8, SOP
SETTINGS.)
2 Run [Maintenance] [Quality Control] and click on the [New file] button to open the [File
Settings] dialog, and then click on the [New file] button.
Figure 6-3: [Add Quality Control File] dialog
Item Explanation
Sample
Information
SOP name Select the SOP name you want to display on the QC chart
screen. (For SOP, refer to CHAPTER 8: SOP SETTINGS".)
Parameter Select the measurement parameter you want to control quality
from one of [Analyzed], [Particles], [Limit X axis] and [Limit Y axis]
categories. (The actual display names for "Limit X axis" and "Limit
Y axis" are the limit axes names set with the SOP.
Item Select the measurement parameter you want to control quality.
The parameters selected under [Parameters] are displayed in the
list.
QC Limit
Settings
Test data When "Read Data from DB" is selected, the past data meeting the
SOP name, parameters and items selected in setting the control
samples is handled as an effective data and create a QC data
file.If you select Stop by Time mode and repeat mesure count is
set more than 2, only first data will be imported as control data.
When "Do not read Data from DB" is selected, a QC data file
consisting of SOP name, parameters and items selected in
setting the new control samples. In this step, the QC limit settings
selected manually can only be effective.
Table 6-3: [Add Quality Control file] Dialog Items
QUALITY CONTROL
3 Enter quality control file information for the dialog items.
The [QC Chart] screen is displayed as shown below.
Sample
Information
Limit
Settings
Automatic
setting
The record data which have been measured is extracted as the
QC data and QC chart screen will be displayed using the QC limit
settings set with 1 ~ 3SD.
Select upper limit:
When you want to control quality using the mean value and the
QC limit settings due to SD after reading the measured data,
select the upper limit in the QC area.
1SD ~3SD are provided.
Select lower limit:
When you want to control quality using the mean value and the
QC limit settings due to SD after reading the measured data,
select the lower limit in the QC area.
1SD ~3SD are provided.
QC Limit
Settings
Manual
setting
Create a QC file based on the settings of the target, upper limit
and lower limit.
Target:
Input the target in display of the measurement parameter you
want to control quality.
Upper limit:
Input the upper limit in display of the measurement parameter you
Lower limit:
Input the lower limit in display of the measurement parameter you
Registration The QC file is created.
Cancel Cancel the processing and close the [Add Quality Control file] dialog.
Item Explanation
Table 6-3: [Add Quality Control file] Dialog Items
(D)
(C)
(A)
(B)
Error status display
QUALITY CONTROL
Figure 6-4: Explanation of the quality control charts
When the items set for the five parameters(OLensUnit,Light field system,SOP name,paramater and
items) are selected, the following are displayed.
(A) Quality control graphs.
(B) Quality control data target values, upper and lower limit values, average, SD, data average,
number of QC error data.
(C) QC data list.
Under (A), the average value is displayed as a green line, the upper and lower limit values as red
lines, and the data points as a black line.
Under (B), data exceeding the QC limits are displayed in red spaces within (C), and the number of
QC error data is indicated under the [QC Error] field of (B).
1.4 Deleting a quality control file
Delete the currently registered quality control data.
1 On the [QC Chart] dialog, select the SOP name, parameters and items for the quality control
chart.
2 Display the quality control data to delete.
3 Press the [DeleteFile] button on the [File Settings] dialog.
Figure 6-5: [Delete QC files] dialog
The selected quality control data is deleted.
CAUTION
If you register a quality control file, information will be imported in the quality
control file automatically when you measure a sample using pertinent SOP from
then on.
If quality control range is invalid, a quality control invalid dialog will be shown.
Check whether the qualify control sample and the measurement of the FPIA-3000
are normal.
This dialog box will be closed when [OK] button is pressed.
QUALITY CONTROL
1.5 Target setting
The dialog box below appears when the [Target Limit Setting] button is clicked on the [File
Settings] dialog.
Figure 6-6: QC Target Settings
1 Enter the target value, upper limit value and lower limit value.
The value is reflected.
1.6 Auto target
Click the [Auto Target] button on the [File Settings] dialog to display the figure below.
Figure 6-7: [Setting Target Limit] dialog
1 Select the upper and lower limit values for the target value from 13 DS.
The target value is updated.
QUALITY CONTROL
1.7 Deleting a quality control data
The dialog box below appears when the [Delete] button is clicked.
Figure 6-8: [Delete QC Data] dialog
1 Select the quality control data numbers to delete by specifying the first and last numbers in the
range to be deleted.
Figures can be entered directly.
2 Press the [OK] button.
The specified data is deleted.
QUALITY CONTROL
Blank page.
Chapter 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Error messages ........................................................................................... 7-1
1.1 Resetting the alarm............................................................................... 7-1
1.2 Reverting from an error ......................................................................... 7-2
1.3 Display of error history .......................................................................... 7-3
2. Error message list ....................................................................................... 7-4
2.1 Error message (in alphabetical order)................................................... 7-4
2.2 Error code list ........................................................................................ 7-6
2.3 Error message list by function............................................................... 7-7
3. Error messages and troubleshooting .......................................................... 7-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Error messages
1.1 Resetting the alarm
When an error occurs with the device, an alarm sounds and a message appears on the screen.
Click the [Stop Alarm] button on the [Maintenance] [Error History] screen to stop the
alarm.
Figure 7-1: Stop Alarm
TROUBLESHOOTING
1.2 Reverting from an error
When an error occurs, recover from it with reference to the action messages displayed.
1 When an error occurs, a message appears accompanied by an alarm.
Error messages can also be displayed by selecting [Maintenance] [Error History].
2 Confirm the error message, and click on the [Recover] button.
The FPIA-3000 reverts from the error automatically.
When the device does not revert from the error even after pressing the button, refer to Chapter 7,
7-9 Error messages and troubleshooting.
Figure 7-2: Recover
TROUBLESHOOTING
1.3 Display of error history
Past errors can be displayed as a list.
1 Select [Maintenance] [Error History].
The Error History screen is then displayed. The error history contains the fifty most recent error
records. When the number of error records exceeds fifty, records are erased starting with the
oldest first.
Figure 7-3: [Error History] screen
When you click the [CSV] button, the [Save As] dialog is displayed. Here, when you specify the
folder and input the file name, the error history information recorded in the database is created in
CSV format in the folder with the specified file name.
Item Explanation
Recover Check marks are displayed next to errors from which the system has already
reverted.
Date Displays the date and time of the error.
User name The name of the user who was logged on at the time of the error is displayed.
Error code Displays the number specific to the error.
Errors Displays the content of the error that has occurred.
Table 7-1: [Error History] dialog items
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Error message list
2.1 Error message (in alphabetical order)
[0]
-0.053MPa pressure Error. ............................................................................................... 7-11
0.22MPa pressure Error. ................................................................................................... 7-11
[C]
Cleaning Pressure Error.................................................................................................... 7-11
[D]
Data file cannot open. ....................................................................................................... 7-14
Detection time-out ............................................................................................................ 7-12
[F]
Filter Change Error............................................................................................................. 7-9
[G]
Gas sensor of detector part is out of service. .................................................................... 7-14
[I]
Image analysis time-out.................................................................................................... 7-12
IP board is not connect. .................................................................................................... 7-13
[M]
Magnification Change Error. .............................................................................................. 7-9
[R]
Replace sheath liquid........................................................................................................ 7-10
[S]
Sample Syringe Error. ........................................................................................................ 7-9
Sheath Syringe Error. ......................................................................................................... 7-9
Solvent is Leaked from detector. ...................................................................................... 7-14
Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit ..................................................................................... 7-14
[T]
The automatic focusing Error. .......................................................................................... 7-10
The checksum of EEPROM is wrong. ............................................................................. 7-13
The communications to IP board had error. ..................................................................... 7-13
The communications to the temperature control board had error. ................................... 7-13
The fan (fluid unit) is out of service. ................................................................................ 7-13
The fan (rear side) is out of service. ................................................................................. 7-13
The fan (stir unit) is out of service. .................................................................................. 7-13
The flash brightness cannot adjust. .................................................................................. 7-10
The flash brightness(DF) cannot adjust............................................................................ 7-10
The flash brightness is abnormal. ..................................................................................... 7-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
The flash has abnormal brightness....................................................................................7-10
The gas sensor of Fluid unit is out of service. ..................................................................7-14
The pressure decrease abnormality...................................................................................7-11
The rejection liquid Chamber cannot exhaust...................................................................7-11
The sampling cover Error. ................................................................................................7-12
Testing unit communication error. (command transmission error) ..................................7-14
Testing unit communication error. (response time-out)....................................................7-14
Testing unit communication error. (USB protocol error) .................................................7-14
The testing unit is not connected.......................................................................................7-14
The stir motor cannot adjust..............................................................................................7-10
The stir motor had abnormal rotation. ................................................................................7-9
The temperature control board is not connect...................................................................7-13
The temperature of the sheath liquid is out of range.........................................................7-12
The temperature of the testing unit is out of range. ..........................................................7-12
The temperature of the thermo fin is out of range. ...........................................................7-12
The Temperature sensor of the detector is not connected.................................................7-13
The Temperature sensor of the sheath liquid is not connected. ........................................7-13
The Temperature sensor of the testing unit is not connected............................................7-13
The Temperature sensor of the thermo fin is not connected.............................................7-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
2.2 Error code list
113010 Cleaning Pressure Error...................................................................................... 7-11
113022 0.22MPa pressure Error. ..................................................................................... 7-11
114005 -0.053MPa pressure Error. ................................................................................. 7-11
119010 The pressure decrease abnormality .................................................................... 7-11
121030 The temperature of the testing unit is out of range............................................. 7-12
123019 The temperature of the sheath liquid is out of range. ......................................... 7-12
125520 The temperature of the thermo fin is out of range. ............................................. 7-12
127410 The Temperature sensor of the sheath liquid is not connected. ......................... 7-13
127411 The Temperature sensor of the thermo fin is not connected. ............................. 7-13
127900 The Temperature sensor of the testing unit is not connected. ............................ 7-13
127910 The Temperature sensor of the detector is not connected. ................................. 7-13
132910 Replace sheath liquid.......................................................................................... 7-10
141000 The rejection liquid Chamber cannot exhaust. ................................................... 7-11
212000 Sheath Syringe Error. ........................................................................................... 7-9
214010 Sample Syringe Error. .......................................................................................... 7-9
242100 The stir motor had abnormal rotation. .................................................................. 7-9
242101 The stir motor cannot adjust. .............................................................................. 7-10
351010 Magnification Change Error. ................................................................................ 7-9
351030 Filter Change Error. .............................................................................................. 7-9
351040 The flash brightness cannot adjust. .................................................................... 7-10
351040 The flash brightness(DF) cannot adjust.............................................................. 7-10
351050 The flash has abnormal brightness. .................................................................... 7-10
351051 The flash brightness is abnormal. ....................................................................... 7-10
351110 Detection time-out .............................................................................................. 7-12
351120 Image analysis time-out...................................................................................... 7-12
421520 The sampling cover Error. .................................................................................. 7-12
429100 Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit ....................................................................... 7-14
429101 Solvent is Leaked from detector......................................................................... 7-14
429110 The gas sensor of Fluid unit is out of service. .................................................... 7-14
429111 Gas sensor of detector part is out of service. ...................................................... 7-14
429120 The fan (rear side) is out of service. ................................................................... 7-13
429121 The fan (fluid unit) is out of service. .................................................................. 7-13
429122 The fan (stir unit) is out of service. .................................................................... 7-13
431020 The checksum of EEPROM is wrong. ............................................................... 7-13
432042 Data file cannot open. ......................................................................................... 7-14
441092 Testing unit communication error. (response time-out) ..................................... 7-14
441093 Testing unit communication error. (command transmission error).................... 7-14
451064 The communications to the temperature control board had error. ..................... 7-13
451065 The temperature control board is not connect. ................................................... 7-13
451081 IP board is not connect. ...................................................................................... 7-13
451082 The communications to IP board had error. ....................................................... 7-13
466110 The automatic focusing Error. ............................................................................ 7-10
486020 The testing unit is not connected. ....................................................................... 7-14
486021 Testing unit communication error. (USB protocol error)................................... 7-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
2.3 Error message list by function
[Motor-related]
The sampling cover Error. ...............................................................................................7-12
The stir motor had abnormal rotation. ...............................................................................7-9
The stir motor cannot adjust. ............................................................................................7-10
Sheath Syringe Error. .........................................................................................................7-9
The automatic focusing Error. .........................................................................................7-10
Magnification Change Error. .............................................................................................7-9
The fan (stir unit) is out of service. ..................................................................................7-13
The fan (rear side) is out of service. .................................................................................7-13
The fan (fluid unit) is out of service. ...............................................................................7-13
Filter Change Error. ...........................................................................................................7-9
[Aspiration-Related]
Sample Syringe Error. ........................................................................................................7-9
[Chamber-related]
Replace sheath liquid. ......................................................................................................7-10
The rejection liquid Chamber cannot exhaust. .................................................................7-11
[Pressure-related]
0.22 MPa pressure Error ...................................................................................................7-11
-0.053 MPa pressure Error ................................................................................................7-11
The pressure decrease abnormality ..................................................................................7-11
[Temperature-related]
The communications to the temperature control board had error. ....................................7-13
The temperature control board is not connect. .................................................................7-13
The Temperature sensor of the detector is not connected. ...............................................7-13
The temperature of the sheath liquid is out of range. .......................................................7-12
The Temperature sensor of the sheath liquid is not connected. .......................................7-13
The temperature of the testing unit is out of range. .........................................................7-12
The Temperature sensor of the testing unit is not connected. ..........................................7-13
The temperature of the thermo fin is out of range. ..........................................................7-12
The Temperature sensor of the thermo fin is not connected. ...........................................7-13
[Processor-Related]
The checksum of EEPROM is wrong. .............................................................................7-13
The communications to IP board had error. .....................................................................7-13
IP board is not connect. ....................................................................................................7-13
Image analysis time-out ....................................................................................................7-12
Detection time-out.............................................................................................................7-12
Testing unit communication error. (response time-out)....................................................7-14
Testing unit communication error. (command transmission error) ..................................7-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
[Host-Related]
Testing unit communication error. (USB protocol error)................................................. 7-14
The testing unit is not connected. ..................................................................................... 7-14
Data file cannot open. ....................................................................................................... 7-14
[Gas sensor related]
Solvent is Leaked from detector. ...................................................................................... 7-14
Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit. .................................................................................... 7-14
Gas sensor of detector part is out of service. .................................................................... 7-14
The gas sensor of Fluid unit is out of service. .................................................................. 7-14
[Other]
The flash has abnormal brightness. ................................................................................. 7-10
The flash brightness cannot adjust. ................................................................................. 7-10
The flash brightness(DF) cannot adjust. .......................................................................... 7-10
The flash brightness is abnormal. .................................................................................... 7-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Error messages and troubleshooting
This section explains error messages and the relevant countermeasures to be taken.
When an error occurs, take the appropriate action referring to the information provided in this
section. If you still cannot revert from the error after taking all measures that are suggested, contact
your Sysmex service representative for an inspection.
Error code 212000
Error message Sheath Syringe Error.
Cause 1) The sheath syringe malfunctioned.
Solution 1) Revert from the error.
Error code 214010
Error message Sample Syringe Error.
Cause 1) The sample aspiration syringe malfunctioned.
Error code 351010
Error message Magnification Change Error.
Cause 1) The mechanism for switching between the high power test mode and the low power test mode
inside the optical detector malfunctioned.
Error code 351030
Error message Filter Change Error.
Cause 1) When the optical sensor switched magnification, the ND filter for light adjustment did not switch
normally.
Error code 242100
Error message The stir motor had abnormal rotation.
Cause 1) The rpm of the mixing motor exceeded the set range during testing.
Solution 1) Revert from the error, then check the mixing motor rpm.(See Chapter 15, 2.9 Stir motor
adjustment.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code 242101
Error message The stir motor cannot adjust.
Cause 1) The motor rpm was not automatically adjusted normally during the mixing motor rpm
adjustment sequence.
Error code 351051
Error message The flash brightness is abnormal.
Cause 1) The stroboscope did not flash normally.
Error code 351050
Error message The flash has abnormal brightness.
Cause 1) Stroboscope brightness value was outside the normal range during flash.
Error code 351040
Error message 1) The flash brightness cannot adjust.
2) The flash brightness(DF) cannot adjust.
Cause 1) The stroboscope brightness was not automatically adjusted normally during the stroboscope
brightness adjustment sequence.
2) The stroboscope brightness was not adjusted normally during the stroboscope brightness
adjustment sequence in the optional dark field mode.
Solution 1) 2) Revert from the error.
Error code 466110
Error message The automatic focusing Error.
Cause 1) The auto focusing sequence did not function properly.
Solution 1) Use the manual focus function to focus roughly, then try auto focusing again. (Refer to
Chapter 15, 2.3 Manual focusing)
Error code 132910
Error message Replace sheath liquid.
Cause 1) The sheath liquid has run out.
2) The tube for aspirating the sheath liquid is bent.
Solution 1) Replace the sheath liquid container with a new one, then revert from the error.
2) Unbend the tube, then revert from the error.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code 141000
Error message The rejection liquid Chamber cannot exhaust.
Cause 1) The tube for discarding waste fluid is bent.
Solution 1) Unbend the tube, then revert from the error.
Error code 113022
Error message 0.22MPa pressure Error.
Cause 1) No pressure supplied from the pneumatic unit.
2) The tube for supplying pressure from the pneumatic unit is bent.
Solution 1) Adjust the pressure from the pneumatic unit, and revert from the error. (Refer to Chapter 14,
1. Adjusting the pressure of the pneumatic unit.)
Error code 113010
Error message Cleaning Pressure Error.
3) Adjustment of the pressure inside the testing unit was wrong.
3) Readjust the pressure inside the testing unit, then revert from the error. (Refer to Chapter 14,
2.3 Adjustment of rinse pressure.)
Error code 119010
Error message The pressure decrease abnormality
3) See if the testing-unit pressure matches that for the current sheath liquid. If not, adjust it, then
revert from the error.
Error code 114005
Error message -0.053MPa pressure Error.
Cause 1) No vacuum supplied from the vacuum unit.
2) The tube for supplying vaccum from the vacuum unit is bent.
Solution 1) Readjust the pressure inside the testing unit, then revert from the error. (Refer to Chapter 14,
2.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure.)
3) Readjust the pressure inside the testing unit, then revert from the error. (Refer to Chapter 14,
2.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code 121030
Error message The temperature of the testing unit is out of range.
Cause 1) Ambient temperature has left the 15-30C range.
Solution 1) Adjust the ambient temperature to 15-30C.
Error code 123019
Error message The temperature of the sheath liquid is out of range.
Cause 1) Sheath liquid temperature has deviated from the set value.
Solution 1) The error is cancelled automatically when the sheath liquid temperature enters the set range.
If the error persists, contact your Sysmex service representative for an inspection.
Error code 125520
Error message The temperature of the thermo fin is out of range.
Cause 1) Temperature near the radiator fins has deviated from the set value.
Solution 1) Turn off the instrument power, then contact your Sysmex service representative for an
inspection.
Error code 351110
Error message Detection time-out
Cause 1) A communication error occurred between the testing unit and the data processing unit.
Solution 1) Check that the USB cable is connected, then revert from the error.
Error code 351120
Error message Image analysis time-out
Cause 1) Image analysis processing did not complete within the regulation time.
Error code 421520
Error message The sampling cover Error.
Cause 1) The opening/closing action of the sample mixing chamber cover did not function properly.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code 429120, 429121, 429122
Error message The fan (rear side) is out of service.
The fan (fluid unit) is out of service.
The fan (stir unit) is out of service.
Cause 1) The fan installed in the instrument is not working normally.
inspection.
Error code 127900, 127410, 127411, 127910
Error message The Temperature sensor of the testing unit is not connected.
The Temperature sensor of the sheath liquid is not connected.
The Temperature sensor of the thermo fin is not connected.
The Temperature sensor of the detector is not connected.
Cause 1) A wire for the temperature thermister has broken.
inspection.
Error code 431020
Error message The checksum of EEPROM is wrong.
Cause 1) There was an error in reading from the Main Unit EEPROM.
Solution 1) Restart the entire device.
Error code 451081, 451082
Error message IP board is not connect.
The communications to IP board had error.
Cause 1) There was a communications error between the IP board in the Main Unit and the data
processing unit.
Error code 451064, 451065
Error message The communications to the temperature control board had error.
The temperature control board is not connect.
Cause 1) There was a communications error between the temperature controller in the Main Unit and the
Main Unit control section.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code 441092, 441093,486020, 486021
Error message Testing unit communication error. (response time-out)
Testing unit communication error. (command transmission error)
The testing unit is not connected.
Testing unit communication error. (USB protocol error)
Cause 1) There was an error in communications between the Main Unit and the data processing unit.
Solution 1) Check the wiring between the Main Unit and the data processing unit, then restart the entire
device.
Error code 432042
Error message Data file cannot open.
Cause 1) There was an error in a file within the data processing unit.
Error code 429100, 429101
Error message Solvent is Leaked from fluid unit.
Solvent is Leaked from detector.
Cause 1) When alcohol is used as the sheath liquid, a gas sensor installed in the fluid unit detection unit
detected an alcohol leak.
Solution 1) Immediately turn off the instrument power, then contact your Sysmex service representative for
an inspection.
Error code 429110, 429111
Error message The gas sensor of Fluid unit is out of service.
Gas sensor of detector part is out of service.
Cause 1) The gas sensor installed in the fluid unit detection unit broke down.
Solution 1) Immediately turn off the instrument power, then contact your Sysmex service representative for
an inspection.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Other precautions
CAUTION
Installation and operation of software other than FPIA-3000 has not been verified.
Also, we provide no warranty or support for them.
Do not connect/disconnect USB peripheral equipment at a USB port of the data
processing section (analysis PC) while operating the FPIA-3000. Also, do not
execute any software other than this application while operating the FPIA-3000.
CAUTION
When measuring high concentration samples (36,000 pieces/l or more), the
Image capture timeout or Image analysis timeout error message may be
displayed, depending on the particle diameter and form for the measured sample.
In that case, recover from the error, eliminate the error, then remeasure with the
sample concentration diluted.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Blank page.
Chapter 8 SOP SETTINGS
1. SOP settings ............................................................................................... 8-1
1.1 Explanation of SOP............................................................................... 8-1
1.2 Using SOPs........................................................................................... 8-1
1.3 Registering SOPs.................................................................................. 8-1
1.4 Changing SOP's name.......................................................................... 8-2
1.5 Editing and deleting SOPs .................................................................... 8-2
1.6 SOP Import / Export .............................................................................. 8-4
SOP SETTINGS
1. SOP settings
1.1 Explanation of SOP
SOP is the abbreviation for Standard Operation Procedure. The measurement conditions, analysis
conditions, hardware settings, and other setting information related to measurement are managed
all together in the database in the analysis PC, making it easy to manage user measurement
conditions. FPIA-3000 has functions for registering, deleting, editing, and using SOPs.
SOPs can be selected in the measurement and analysis condition dialogs and used for
measurement.
On the analysis results screen, new SOPs can be registered and SOPs selected to use for data re-
analysis.
You can do the followings with [Settings] [SOP]; register, edit, delete, export and import
SOPs, and change the names of them.
1.2 Using SOPs
Already registered SOPs can be selected for use in measurement from the measurement and
analysis condition dialogs. For the concrete usage procedure, refer to Chapter 4, 3.2 SOP setting.
On the analysis results screen, existing SOPs can be selected to use for data re-analysis. For the
concrete usage procedure, refer to Chapter 5, 2.5 Reanalyze.
1.3 Registering SOPs
On the [SOP Setting] dialog, new SOPs can be registered, and new SOPs can be registered on the
analysis results screen. For the concrete usage procedure, refer to Chapter 5, 2.5 Reanalyze.
How to register the SOP using [Settings] - [SOP] is explained here.
Use the Up and Down buttons to select the item from the SOP list you want to check in the SOP
settings dialog, and press the [Registration] button.
Figure 8-1: [new SOP registration] dialog
Input the SOP name in the SOP name input area and press the [OK] button.
When a message which says Save New SOP, Are you sure ? is displayed, press the [OK] button.
The new entered SOP name is registered and displayed in the SOP list.
To edit the SOP, refer to 1.5 Editing and deleting SOPs.
New SOP Registration
SOP SETTINGS
1.4 Changing SOP's name
Select the SOP you want to change its name from the SOP list in the SOP Settings dialog. When
you press the [Name Change] button, the following dialog will be displayed.
Figure 8-2: [SOP name change] dialog
Change the SOP name indicated in the SOP name change area and press the [OK] button.
When a message which says "Replace SOP. Are you sure ?" appears, press the [OK] button.
The SOP name is changed.
You can confirm the changed SOP name from the SOP list in the SOP Settings dialog.
1.5 Editing and deleting SOPs
You can edit and delete SOPs with [Settings] [SOP].
Figure 8-1 is displayed via [Settings] [SOP].
It can be used to edit and delete SOPs.
(1) Editing SOPs
A list of the registered SOPs is displayed in the SOP settings window. Left click the name of the
SOP you want to edit or check in the SOP list box. The detailed parameters of the selected SOP are
displayed in the right list box in the SOP settings window.
To edit SOP parameters, left click the appropriate value field in the SOP settings window. This
enables you to select an item for the information or to edit it.
After selecting an item for the stipulated information or editing it, press the [Update] button. The
SOP contents are changed. When the LensUnit changing combo box in the SOP settings window
is selected and the magnification of the lens unit is changed, the corresponding SOP is displayed in
the SOP list box. Light field system (Bright field/Dark field) can be switched only when the
standard magnification (10X) is selected.
CAUTION
Following SOP name cannot be changed.
AUTOFOCUS, AUTOFOCUSMSR, CALIBHPF and CALIBLPF
NOTE: For details of the Objective Lens, refer to the Appendix H, HIGH/LOW
MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION).
For details of the Light field system, refer to the Appendix J, FPIA-3000 DARK
FIELD UNIT MANUAL.
SOP name change area
SOP SETTINGS
(2) Deleting SOPs
Registered SOPs can be deleted. Select the SOP you want to delete from the list of registered SOPs
in the SOP settings window, then left click that SOP name to select it.
Press the [Del. SOP] button. That SOP information is deleted.
Figure 8-3: [Setting SOP] screen
If you press the button, the display position of the SOP selected by the cursor moves up by one.
The display order can be changed in the SOP list that is used for measurement conditions etc. The
SOP list follows the testing and analysis parameter (SOP) list display order.
If you press the button, the display position of the SOP selected by the cursor moves down by
one.
Refer to Appendix C, 2. Table of SOP settings for SOP settings.
When the SOP information is updated, the update date on the SOP setting dialog is changed to the
update date.
You can select the SOP for the O Lens Unit 5X, O Lens Unit 10X or O Lens Unit 20X from the O
lens unit list box. Each SOP list will be displayed in the SOP list.
CAUTION
Following SOP name cannot be changed.
AUTOFOCUS, AUTOFOCUSMSR, CALIBHPF and CALIBLPF
SOP SETTINGS
1.6 SOP Import / Export
(1) Export SOP
You can export the selected SOP or the all registered SOP information in the file. (The file
name should be **.sop.)
Use the radio button at the lower of the Import button and select All Data or Selected Data.
When the [Export] button is pressed, the following dialog will be displayed.
Figure 8-4: [Save As..] dialog
Select the folder you want to save or create a new folder here. Input the SOP save file name in the
file name input area and press the [Save] button. The SOP information will be exported.
File name input area
SOP SETTINGS
(2) Import SOP
Press [Import] button. followg Figure 8-5 SOP list dialog will be shown.
In this dialog, click SOP name, highlight the SOP names by dragging the mouse over it with
pressing left cursor or select [Select All] button. Press [Import] button if you select SOP.
Figure 8-5: [SOP list] dialog
Reread the imported SOP and additionally register it in the present SOP information.
If the registered SOP name and the SOP name to be exported are the same or if the update date
or content is different form the file information to be exported, "Same name already exists.
Please input another name." dialog will be displayed.
When you change the import SOP name here and press the [OK] button, the SOP will be
imported as another name.
The exported SOP name and the registered SOP name will be displayed in the SOP list.
NOTE: When the contents of the registered SOP and the SOP to be exported are the same
even if the both names are the same and the update dates are different, SOP will not be
imported.
SOP SETTINGS
Figure 8-6 explains the overall flow of the FPIA-3000 analysis using the SOP.
Figure 8-6: Relational chart for SOP settings
Analysis conditions setting screen (SOP settings when analyzing)
This screen can be used to set the SOP conditions by the following two
methods.
1) Select the existing SOP conditions and carry out analysis
2) Select the existing SOP conditions and revise them to carry out
analysis
The revised SOP settings will not be registered if you select 2).
When reanalyzing
(after analysis)
SOP selection and revision screen
List boxes that include revised
conditions cannot be selected.
Reanalysis screen
When reanalyzing,
1) Perform reanalysis using the existing SOP
2) Register a new SOP based on the existing SOP
conditions to carry out reanalysis
Setting SOPs and reanalysis can be carried out with the
two methods above.
Reanalysis conditions setting screen
Select the existing SOP and edit
parameters. When the parameters are
changed, the list cannot be selected.
SOP settings
The screen can be used to register, edit or
delete the existing SOPs.
Chapter 9 SYSTEM SETUP
1. System setup............................................................................................... 9-1
1.1 Setting menu items ............................................................................... 9-1
1.2 System settings..................................................................................... 9-1
2. Sheath fluid settings (Only for the FPIA-3000S) ......................................... 9-5
2.1 Effects by sheath physical characteristics............................................. 9-5
2.2 Sheath fluid specific hardware settings................................................. 9-6
SYSTEM SETUP
1. System setup
This section explains the items in the [Settings] menu which concern the instrument system.
1.1 Setting menu items
Available menu items when the [Settings] menu is selected are listed below. These are the items
related to system settings and sheath liquid. Sheath Liquid settings appears only in FPIA-3000S.
Figure 9-1: [Settings] menu(FPIA-3000)
1.2 System settings
Settings can be made for the instrument system.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [System Parameters].
Figure 9-2: [System Parameters] dialog
SYSTEM SETUP
Move the scroll bar in the [System Parameters] dialog up and down with the mouse to display
the item you want to change, then left click the value field for that item. You can now select an item
for this value or edit this value. Here, either select an item or edit the value.
After editing or selecting an item, press the [OK] button. The value is stored into the database.
When you press the [Export CSV] button, a device settings information file can be created in the
CSV format.
When you press the [Export CSV] button, a dialog is displayed for selecting the folder in which
to store the CSV-format file and for inputting the file name, so specify the folder and input the file
name. The CSV-format file is created in the stipulated folder.
For details on the device related parameters, refer to Appendix C, TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS
for explanations of parameters.
The main system parameter settings are listed below.
Automatic printing
This is the [System] [Print] [Auto Print] field in the dialog.
Select [Apply] or [Not Apply]. If [Apply] is selected, results will be printed out automatically
after every test. Select [Not Apply] to prevent automatic printing.
Setting the pneumatic unit timer
This is the [Testing unit] [Pneumatic Unit Timer] field in the dialog. The timeout period can
be set.
[ON] or [OFF] can be selected in the [ON/OFF] column. Select [ON] to enable the pneumatic unit
timer.
The [Timeout Duration] is the length of time, in minutes, from the pneumatic unit entering ready
mode to it entering sleep mode. If [ON] and [Timeout period Timer] are set, the pneumatic unit
will stop (enter sleep mode) once the set timeout period has elapsed from the start of ready mode
operation. Tests cannot be run in sleep mode.
To run a test, press the [Pneumatic Unit] button on the analytical conditions screen to restart the
pneumatic unit.
After the pneumatic unit restarts, it returns to ready mode and can run tests.
SYSTEM SETUP
Transmission condition settings
Make settings for host transmission. There are two types of setting.
1) Hardware settings on the host.
2) Settings related to the transmitted data.
Refer to Appendix D, OUTPUT FORMAT for the communications specification to the host.
1) Host hardware settings
This instrument can output data via RS-232C port or LAN port, with corresponding hardware
settings.
Set Items Explanation
Port No. Set the COM port number. (port 1 or 2)
Baud rate Select the baud rate, from 1,200/4,800/9,600/19,200/28,800/
38,400.
Character Size Select seven bit or eight bit character length.
Parity Select parity, from Even/Odd/None.
Stop bit Select the stop bit, from 1/2.
Class Select the transfer protocol (CLASSA/CLASSB).
Delay time Set the interval between frame data transmissions. Set the time in
one second units by entering the value (015).
Table 9-1: [System Parameters] dialog RS-232C settings
Set Items Explanation
IP Address Set the LAN address (*4), an integer in the range 0-255.
Port No. Set the host port number.
Delay Time Set the interval between frame transmissions.
Table 9-2: [System Parameters] dialog LAN settings
SYSTEM SETUP
IP addresses are set as follows:
***. ***. ***. ***
Address *1
Address *2
Address *3
Address *4
2) Settings related to the transmitted data
Besides test results, particularity tables, form tables and scattergrams can be selected as data for
transmission to the host computer, by setting [Transmission] [Auto Transmission] under
[System Parameters].
If the setting for Automatic transmission (serial) or Automatic transmission (LAN) is set to
[Apply], data will be sent to the host automatically with each test.
Host data automatic transmission
By setting the transmission block and automatic transmission in [Settings] [System
Parameters], you can select the data to be sent to the host and select whether or not results are
sent to the host automatically after measurement.
Size-Data Table transmission: When this is set to Apply, the particle diameter table data is
transmitted after the default send data.
Shape-Data transmission: When this is set to Apply, the form table data is transmitted
after that.
Scattergram transmission: When this is set to Apply, the scattergram data is transmitted
after that.
Extension analysis transmission When this is set to Apply, exhancing analysis data is
transmitted after that.
Auto transmission (serial): When this is set to Apply, after measurement, the results are
automatically transmitted to the host via serial
communications.
Auto transmission (LAN): When this is set to Apply, after measurement, the results are
automatically transmitted to the host via the network.
Select Transmission Data: All/Normal/Abnormal
When All is selected, all data is transmitted whether it is
normal or abnormal.
When you select Normal data, only the normal data is
transmitted.
When you select Abnormal data, only the abnormal data is
transmitted.
SYSTEM SETUP
2. Sheath fluid settings (Only for the FPIA-3000S)
2.1 Effects by sheath physical characteristics
Particle images are captured with the most appropriate focusing conditions by focusing the
objective lens on the flat sample layer that is formed in the flow cell by a sheath flow.
This flat sheath formation is highly influenced by the sheath fluid flow and the physical
characteristics of the sheath fluid, such as viscosity and specific gravity.
When a high viscosity fluid, such as 2-propernol, is used as a sheath fluid instead of PARTICLE
SHEATH, for example, the sample flow is not thin enough in the flow cell and poorly focused
images will be obtained. In this case, the sheath fluid flow is increased compared with that of
PARTICLE SHEATH, and sample flow is given with a bigger shearing stress to form a thinner flat
sheath flow as similar to that with PARTICLE SHEATH.
Accordingly, when a lower viscosity fluid, such as methanol, is used as a sheath fluid, a sample is
widely spread and the flat sheath formation becomes unstable. In this case, the sheath fluid flow is
decreased compared with that of PARTICLE SHEATH, and sample flow is given with a smaller
shearing stress to form a stable flat sheath flow as similar to that with PARTICLE SHEATH.
It is necessary to control the fluid flow of the sample and sheath fluid in accordance with the
physical characteristics of the sheath fluid to be used.
FPIA-3000S employs 2 sets of the syringes driven by a stepper motor to allow a control of the
sample flow and the sheath flow individually and to form the most suitable flat sheath.
CAUTION
Depending on the physical characteristics (viscosity and specific gravity)
of the organic solvent to be used, there is a potential that the most
suitable flat sheath formation may not be obtained in the tolerable range
of the syringe speed adjustment by the FPIA-3000S. In this case,
reselect the dispersion medium and the sheath fluid.
SYSTEM SETUP
2.2 Sheath fluid specific hardware settings
When any organic solvent other than the PARTICLE SHEATH is used as a sheath fluid, change
the following hardware setting values according to the physical characteristics (viscosity and
specific gravity) of the sheath fluid.
2.2.1. Sheath syringe speed setting value
Based on the sheath syringe speed Vp when PARTICLE SHEATH is used, the sheath syringe speed
Vs when an organic solvent is used can be calculated using with the viscosity and the specific
gravity of the PARTICLE SHEATH and the organic solvent.
Set Items Descriptions
Sheath formation syringe speed Adjusts the sheath flow in the flow cell by changing the pulse per
second (PPS) of the stepper motor which drives the sheath
formation syringe.
Sample aspiration syringe speed Adjusts the sample suspension flow to feed from the sample
mixing chamber to the flow cell by changing the pulse per second
(PPS) of the stepper motor which drives the sample injection
syringe.
Rinse fluid pressure Adjusts the rinse sheath flow supplied to the sample mixing
chamber and the flow cell by changing the set pressure (MPa) of
the rinse pressure regulator.
Gas sensor level Adjusts the sensitivity of the gas sensor that detects the leakage
of the organic solvent.
Table 9-3: Hardware setting items to adjust for the sheath fluid characteristics
CAUTION
FPIA-3000S controls the temperature of the optical detector unit and the
sheath fluid at 25C. Use the physical characteristics (viscosity and
specific gravity) of the sheath fluid at 25C in the following calculations of
the sheath formation syringe speed and the rinse pressure.
Sheath syringe speed Vs is calculated as follows.
Vs = Vp * (s/s)/(p/p)
= Vp * s/p
Here, s is the viscosity of the applied organic solvent at 25C (mPas).
p is the viscosity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25C (mPas).
s is the specific gravity of the organic solvent at 25C (no unit).
p is the specific gravity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25C (no unit).
s is the kinematic viscosity of the organic solvent at 25C (m
2
/s).
p is the kinematic viscosity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25C (m
2
/s).
SYSTEM SETUP
An example is shown below to calculate the sheath forming syringe speed Vs when using the
toluene as a sheath fluid.
Therefore, Vs = Vp * (s/s)/(p/p)
= 600 *(0.553/0.862)/(0.890/0.997)
= 431 pps
Item Set value and physical value
Vp: Sheath forming syringe speed
when using the PARTICLE SHEATH
600 pps in the HPF mode
600 pps in the LPF mode
p: Viscosity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25C 0.890 mPas
p: Specific gravity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25C 0.997
Table 9-4: Physical characteristics of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25C
s: Viscosity of the toluene at 25C 0.553 mPas
s: Specific gravity of the toluene at 25C 0.862
Table 9-5: Physical characteristics of the toluene at 25C
NOTE: The set range of the sheath forming speed Vs in the FPIA-3000S is shown in
the following.
Depending on the viscosity and specific gravity of the organic solvent to be
used as a sheath fluid, the sheath forming syringe speed Vs may be calculated
as an outside value of the set range stated above.
If Vs is calculated below the lower limit value, set at the lower limit value. If the
Vs is calculated over the upper limit value, set at the upper limit value.
In this case, particle images may not be well focused or the detected number
of particles may be slightly lower than the actual, since the flat sheath forming
conditions are not the most appropriate.
350 pps Vs 900 pps
If Vs calculated < 350 pps, then set value = 350 pps.
If Vs calculated > 900 pps, then set value = 900 pps.
SYSTEM SETUP
2.2.2. Sample aspiration syringe speed setting value
The sample aspiration syringe speed Us when an organic solvent is used as a sheath fluid is set to
the common value as the sample aspiration syringe speed Up when the PARTICLE SHEATH is
used.
The sample aspiration syringe speed Us = Up = 400 pps
NOTE: When the sample aspiration syringe speed is set as Us = Up = 400 pps as
stated above, the number of detected particles may become very low or very
high depending on the viscosity and specific gravity of the organic solvent.
In this case, prepare a known concentration sample, and readjust the sample
aspiration syringe speed Us by using the analysis results of the known sample
to adjust the number of particles, as follows.
1) Procedures to make a known concentration sample
Using the focus adjustment particle (melamine resign MF-R-2.0) described in Chapter
4, prepare a sample with a known concentration.
(1) Using the following formula, measure the Mg weight of the focus adjustment
particle (melamine resign particle MF-R-2.0).
Here, : particle density (= 1.51 g/cm
3
)
D: particle diameter (= 2 m)
V: sample volume to be prepared
CONC: concentration of the sample to be prepared
For example, when 100 mL of the sample of which concentration is approximately
30000 particles per L is prepared, M = approx. 19 mg.
(2) Mono-disperse the Mg of the focus adjustment particle (melamine resign particle
MF-R-2.0) in the specific volume of the organic solvent. To accelerate dispersion
of the particles, add an appropriate amount of the dispersant according to the
organic solvent to be used, and use the ultrasonic dispersing devices as
required.
2) Re-adjustment of the sample aspiration syringe speed
After the explained settings for the sheath fluid are entered in the analysis software,
run the known concentration sample prepared in the step 1) above.
If analyzed sample concentration is lower than that calculated, heighten the setting
value of the sample aspiration syringe speed.
If analyzed sample concentration is higher than that calculated, lower the setting value
of the sample aspiration syringe speed.
M = (D
3
/6) V CONC
SYSTEM SETUP
2.2.3. Setting value for the rinse pressure
In each run cycle, FPIA-3000S automatically rinses hydraulic parts, such as the sample mixing
chamber and flow cell, in which the sample passes through, using the sheath fluid. The flow of the
rinse fluid is affected by the viscosity of the applied sheath fluid.
Based on the rinse pressure regulator setting value Pp when using the PARTICLE SHEATH, the
rinse pressure Ps for the applied organic solvent is calculated by using the viscosities of the
PARTICLE SHEATH and the applied organic solvent.
An example is shown below to calculate the rinse pressure Pp when using the toluene as a sheath
fluid.
Ps = Pp * (s/p)
= 600 *(0.553/0.890)
= 0.061 MPa
Calculation of the rinse pressure Ps:
Ps = Pp (s/p)
Here, s is the viscosity of the applied organic solvent at 25C (mPas).
p is the viscosity of the PARTICLE SHEATH at 25C (mPas).
Pp: Rinse pressure when using the PARTICLE SHEATH 0.098 MPa
Table 9-6: Rinse pressure when using the PARTICLE SHEATH
NOTE: The set range of the rinse pressure Ps in the FPIA-3000S is shown below.
Depending on the viscosity of the organic solvent to be used as a sheath fluid,
the rinse pressure Ps may be calculated as an outside value of the set range
stated above.
If the calculated Vs exceeded the upper limit of the set range, set to the upper
limit value.
Ps 0.098 MPa
When the calculated Ps > 0.098 MPa, Ps set value = 0.098 MPa.
SYSTEM SETUP
2.2.4. Setting value for the gas sensor level
FPIA-3000S employs a gas sensor built within the instrument to detect any leakage of the organic
solvent. The gas sensor detection level can be selected from 4 levels depending on the applied
sheath fluid. [Level 1] is the most sensitive, and [Level 4] is the least sensitive.
2.2.5. Sheath fluid setting
Register the sheath syringe speed, the sample aspiration syringe speed, the rinse pressure and the
gas sensor level which are calculated or determined for the applied organic solvent in the FPIA-
3000S analysis software.
1) Starting the sheath fluid setting menu:
Select from menu bar [Settings] - [Sheath Liquid Settings] in the FPIA-3000S analysis
software. A dialog will be displayed as shown in Figure 9-3 Setting Parameters Depending
on Sheath fluid.
Figure 9-3: Setting Parameter Depending on the Sheath fluid
WARNING
If an appropriate gas sensor level is not set accordingly to the applied
organic solvent, there is a potential that fire or explosion occurs as the
FPIA-3000S will not detect the leakage of the organic solvent.
CAUTION
Since the gas sensor sensitivity is different on each organic solvent, set
the gas sensor sensitivity according to the organic solvent to be used.
Refer to Appendix E, GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF
FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS, for the popular
organic solvents.
Consult with your Sysmex service representative for the sensor level
setting value that is not listed in the Table E-1.
NOTE: FPIA-3000S analysis software has 5 types of the sheath fluid setting values for
the PARTICLE SHEATH, methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, ethylene glycol
25wt% solution (whose dissolvent is PARTICLE SHEATH), as factory default
values.
SYSTEM SETUP
2) Additional registration of a sheath fluid
When the [Addition] button shown in Figure 9-3 is pressed, a dialog shown in Figure 9-4 will
be displayed and an organic solvent can be added as a sheath fluid candidate. Type in the
sheath fluid name in the edit box, and press the [Registration] button. A new sheath fluid of
which name is as typed in will be registered.
Figure 9-4: Adding a new sheath fluid (an example of toluene)
3) Changing the added sheath fluid hardware settings:
When the [Registration] button is pressed as shown in Figure 9-4, a dialog will be displayed
with the sheath fluid name added and its hardware setting items. Change the values as
calculated accordingly by referring to 2.2.1 through 2.2.4 in this Chapter.
Figure 9-5: Changing the hardware settings (an example of toluene)
Click the [Apply] button shown in Figure 9-5, and the added sheath fluid settings are registered in
the FPIA-3000S analysis software and are displayed when the system is starting up or in the sheath
fluid selection menu when the sheath fluid is replaced.
CAUTION
Immediately after a new sheath fluid is registered, setting values of the
PARTICLE SHEATH are entered as default values. Make sure to
change the setting values accordingly to the applied sheath fluid.
NOTE: In the same procedures described in 3) above, it is also possible to select a
registered sheath fluid and to change setting values for a new sheath fluid.
SYSTEM SETUP
4) Deleting a sheath fluid
It is possible to delete setting for a registered sheath fluid.
Select a sheath fluid in the [sheath fluid type] box shown in Figure 9-3, and press the [Delete]
button. A dialog shown in Figure 9-6 will be displayed. Press [Yes] button and the selected
sheath fluid settings will be deleted from the menu.
Figure 9-6: "Sheath fluid Settings" delete dialog
CAUTION
Particle sheath can not be deleted.
Chapter 10 ANALYSIS PARAMETERS
1. Analysis parameters.................................................................................. 10-1
ANALYSIS PARAMETERS
1. Analysis parameters
The analysis parameters can be set here.
The analysis parameters set here can limit the displays of the limit axis parameter change list box
in the analysis result display, the Diameter list box in the measurement condition setting dialog, and
the Shape list box. The parameters whose checkmarks were removed in the analysis parameter
setting dialog are not displayed in the list boxes above.
Figure 10-1: [Analysis parameters]dialog(1)
Select Enable or Disable and click a checkbox on the analysis parameter setting dialog.
If you press [OK] button, a following dialog which allows you to confirm its message will be
shown.
Then, click [OK] button.
Figure 10-2: [Analysis parameters]dialog(2)
Enable/Disable information in the analysis parameter dialog will become effective after the FPIA-
3000 restarts.
ANALYSIS PARAMETERS
Blank page.
Chapter 11 DISPLAY SETUP
1. View settings ............................................................................................. 11-1
1.1 View settings Record list .................................................................. 11-2
1.2 View settings Result (Graph) ........................................................... 11-3
1.3 View settings Result (List)................................................................ 11-6
1.4 View settings Graph (Trend-View) ................................................... 11-7
1.5 View settings Graph (Overlay-View) ................................................ 11-9
DISPLAY SETUP
1. View settings
Display-related settings can be made.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [View settings].
The following sub-menus will be displayed. The following sub-menus will be displayed.
Item Functions
Record List Set the display items etc. for the Record List screen.
Results (Graph) Set the graph display colors etc. for the Analysis results screen.
Results (List) Set the parameter view positions and view selections in the analysis result
screen.
Graph (Trend-View) Set the graph colors etc. for use on the Graph (trend) screen.
Graph (Overlay-View) Set the graph display colors etc. for use on the Graph(Overlay-View) screen.
Table 11-1: [View settings] submenus
DISPLAY SETUP
1.1 View settings Record list
Set the display items etc. for the [Record List] screen.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [View settings] [Record List].
Items displayed in the selection list are those displayed in the current [Record List] screen.
Figure 11-1: [Record List] dialog
Item Functions
Move (add) all headings to the Selected list.
Move (add) the selected headings to the Selected list.
Move (add) the selected headings to the Unselected list.
Move (add) all headings to the Unselected list.
Raise the display position of the selected heading.
Lower the display position of the selected heading.
Fixed Column Set the number of items that should always be displayed.
Automatic The widths of list display columns are adjusted automatically.
Default The settings will be reset to the factory defaults.
OK Save the settings.
Table 11-2: [Record List] dialog items
DISPLAY SETUP
1.2 View settings Result (Graph)
Set the graph display colors etc. for the [Result Graph] screen.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [View settings] [Result (Graph)].
Figure 11-2: [Result Graph] dialog
DISPLAY SETUP
Item Item Functions
Size
Histgram
Frequency graph Set the Frequency graph display colors.
Cumulative graph Set the Cumulative graph display colors.
Frequency scale Set the frequency scale automatically or manually. If you
remove the check from Auto, the scale is set manually. At this
time, the Fix to **% input item is used as the upper limit for
the scale.
Frequency scale
- Main Scale Pitch
Sets the main scale pitch for the frequency scale.
Frequency scale
- Number of Sub-Scales
Sets the number of auxiliary lines between the main scale of
the frequency scale.
Parameter scale
the particle distribution axis.
Shape
Histgram
Frequency graph Set the Frequency graph display colors.
Cumulative graph Set the Cumulative graph display colors.
Frequency scale Set the frequency scale automatically or manually. If you
remove the check from Auto, the scale is set manually. At this
time, the Fix to **% input item is used as the upper limit for
the scale.
Frequency scale
- Main Scale Pitch
Sets the main scale pitch for the frequency scale.
Frequency scale
the particle form distribution axis.
Parameter scale
- Main Scale Pitch
Set the main scale value for the particle form axis.
Parameter scale
the particle form distribution.
Scattergram Upper Scattergram
number
Set the dot display colors for the upper limit and its above limit.
Middle Range
Frequency
Set the dot display color for the midpoint width, which is
calculated from the set upper limit and lower limit widths.
Lower Scattergram
number
Set the dot display colors for the lower limit and its below limit.
Marked Data Set the color used when a particle has been marked as
selected within the image display.
ForeColor Set the text color for the cell size distribution, particle form and
scattergram.
BackColor Set the background color for the cell size distribution, particle
form and scattergram.
Out of Selection Set the color for the area outside the limits on the Analysis
results screen.
Default Set the settings to the factory defaults.
OK Carry out the settings.
Cancel Cancel the settings.
Table 11-3: [Result Graph] dialog
DISPLAY SETUP
Color settings
The method for setting colors is as described below.
1 Click on the color buttons on the [Result Graph] dialog.
Figure 11-3: [Color] dialog
2 To use colors which do not appear in this dialog, click on the [Define Custom Colors] button.
The user can set any color.
After setting, click on the [OK] button.
Figure 11-4: [Color] dialog
3 Select the color.
The selected color is set.
DISPLAY SETUP
1.3 View settings Result (List)
You can set the view positions of the data in the analysis result screen and select the view of the
screen.
1 Select [Menu] - [Settings] - [View Settings] - [Results (List)].
Figure 11-5: [Results (list)] dialog
When each of the Results (Rectangle limitation) and Results (Polygon limitation) is pressed, the
view position can be changed in the analysis result screen for the specified analysis result
parameter.
Item Functions
Move (add) the all row items to "Selected list".
Move (add) the selected row items to the "Selected list".
Move (add) the selected row items to the "Reserved list".
Move (add) the all row items to the "Reserved list".
Raise the view position of the selected row items.
Lower the view position of the selected row items.
Default Return the settings to the factory defaults.
Table 11-4: [Results (list)] Dialog Items
DISPLAY SETUP
1.4 View settings Graph (Trend-View)
Set the graph colors etc. for use on the [Graph(Trend-View)] screen.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [View settings] [Graph(Trend-View)].
Figure 11-6: [Graph(Trend-View)] dialog
DISPLAY SETUP
Item Item Functions
Size
Parameters
Mean To make average particle diameter a display item, check it and
set the display color.
Mode To make mode diameter a display item, check it and set the
display color.
50% To make 50% diameter a display item, check it and set the
display color.
Upper(%) To make upper diameter (%) a display item, check it and set
the display color.
Lower(%) To make lower diameter (%) a display item, check it and set
the display color.
SD/CV To make particle diameter SD/CV a display item, check it and
set the display color. SD and CV can not be displayed at the
same time.
ForeColor Set the text color.
BackColor Set the background color.
Shape
Parameter
Menu To make average value a display item, check it and set the
display color.
Mode To make mode value a display item, check it and set the
display color.
50% To make 50% value a display item, check it and set the display
color.
Upper(%) To make upper value (%) a display item, check it and set the
display color.
Lower(%) To make lower value (%) a display item, check it and set the
display color.
SD/CV To make particle form SD/CV a display item, check it and set
the display color. SD and CV can not be displayed at the same
time.
Default Set the settings to the factory defaults.
OK Carry out the settings.
Cancel Cancel the settings.
Table 11-5: [Graph(Trend-View)] settings
NOTE: For details on the color settings, refer to Chapter 11, 1.2 View settings Result (Graph)
Color settings.
DISPLAY SETUP
1.5 View settings Graph (Overlay-View)
Set the graph display colors etc. for use on the Graph(Overlay-View) screen.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [View settings] [Graph(Overlay-View)].
Figure 11-7: [Graph(Overlay-View)] dialog
Item Functions
#1 DataColor #10 DataColor Set the display colors for up to 10 test data selected on the Record
list screen.
Default Return the settings to the factory defaults.
Table 11-6: [Graph(Overlay-View)] dialog
NOTE: For details on the color settings, refer to Chapter 11, 1.2 View settings Result (Graph)
Color settings.
DISPLAY SETUP
Blank page.
Chapter 12 PRINT FORMAT
1. Print format ................................................................................................ 12-1
1.1 Importing File ...................................................................................... 12-2
1.2 Saving Files - All Data......................................................................... 12-4
1.3 Saving Files - Selected Data............................................................... 12-4
1.4 New format creation and editing ......................................................... 12-5
1.5 [Save New] button............................................................................. 12-24
1.6 [Delete] button................................................................................... 12-24
1.7 [Preview] button ................................................................................ 12-25
PRINT FORMAT
1. Print format
Print formats can be edited and registered.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [Print format Settings].
Figure 12-1: [Print Format Settings] dialog
Item Functions
Record List tab Set the print format for lists.
Analysis Results tab Set the print format for analysis results.
ParticleImage tab Set the print format for image data.
Graph (Trend-View) tab Set the print format for Graph (trend).
Multi Scattergrams tab Set the print format for Multi Scattergrams.
Graph(Overlay-View) tab Set the print format for Graph(Overlay-View).
Size Frequency tab Set the print format for particle diameter frequency.
Shape Frequency tab Set the print format for particle form frequency.
User definition tab Set a print format with user-defined parameters.
New button Creates a new version of the print format.
Edit button Edits the print format.
Delete button Deletes the print format.
Preview button Displays a preview of the print format.
Close button Close the dialog.
[File] - [Import] Import the print format stored in the exterior unit.
[File] - [Save] - [All Data] Save the all print formats recorded in the FPIA-3000.
[File] - [Save] - [Selected Data] Save the print formats default-set in the FPIA-3000 in the exterior unit.
[File] - [Preview] Displays a preview of the relevant print format.
[Edit] - [New] Create the relevant print format newly
[Edit] - [Edit] Edit and create the relevant print format.
[Edit] - [Delete] Delete the relevant print format.
Table 12-1: [Print Format Settings] dialog items
PRINT FORMAT
This [Print Format Settings] dialog can also be displayed by selecting [Menu] [File]
[Print] [Print Format Settings].
1.1 Importing File
When [File] - [Import] menu is selected from the print format setting dialog, the following dialog
will be displayed.
Figure 12-2: [Print format selection] dialog
Select the file you want to use from the file name selection area in the print format selection dialog
and press the [Open] button.
The relevant file format is imported.
NOTE: Testing result (Standard) display is the default setting of the display format in the
analysis result tab. However a format which can be printed with information of the
cumulative frequency result is also installed and can be used.
PRINT FORMAT
When the information in the format file to be imported and the format information recorded in the
FPIA-3000 are the same, the following dialog will be displayed.
Figure 12-3: [FPIA-3000] dialog
When the recorded format is saved as new name, press the [Yes] button. The following dialog
will be displayed.
Figure 12-4: [Setting print format name] dialog
Input the print format name and comments, and press the [OK] button. The recorded print format
is stored in the FPIA-3000 as the specified name.
When you press the [No] button in the [FPIA-3000] dialog, the imported format is replaced with
the recorded one.
Figure 12-5: [Print Format Settings] dialog
The Printing Format which is saved as another name.
PRINT FORMAT
1.2 Saving Files - All Data
When [File] - [Save] - [All Data] menu is done in the print format setting dialog, the following
Figure 12-6: [Save New as] dialog
Select the place you want to save the data, input the file name in the file name list box and press the
[Save] button.
The print format file will be saved in the selected file folder.
1.3 Saving Files - Selected Data
When [File] - [Save] - [Selected Data] menu is done in the print format setting dialog, the
following dialog will be displayed.
The following process is the same as 2 Saving Files - All Data.
When [All Data] is selected, the all recorded print formats are saved in the specified file, but when
[Selected Data] is selected, only the print formats selected as the defaults in the print format
setting dialog are saved in the specified file.
NOTE: The print format file name should be **.spf.
PRINT FORMAT
1.4 New format creation and editing
Follow the procedure below to edit a print format as a new format.
1 Press the [Analysis Results] tab.
2 When creating a new print format, press the [New] button.
Figure 12-7: [Editting List Print Format] dialog
Item Explanation
Components for graphic
(icons)
Left click the component icon to place, then drag it into the print format
area.
Paper size Select the size (height and width) of the paper as A4/A3/B4/B5/letter.
Preview Display a preview of the created print layout.
Del Specify a certain placed component and delete it.
DelAll Delete all placed components.
Save New Save the created and edited print layout.
Replace Overwrite the created and edited print layout.
Cancel Close the print layout without saving.
Bring to Front The selected parts will be displayed in the front side by pressing [Bring
to Front] after selecting the parts arranged in the print form in the form
design dialog.
Send to Back The selected parts will be displayed in the back side by pressing [Send
to Back] after selecting the parts arranged in the print form in the form
design dialog.
Table 12-2: [Editting List Print Format] dialog items
Components for
graphic icons
Print form
PRINT FORMAT
3 When creating an existing print format, press the [Edit] button.
Enable editing of a print layout.
4 To edit, select the part you want to print by clicking its icon on the left, move it to the desired
print position by moving the mouse while holding its left button down (dragging), decide the
size, then release. The print image of the selected part is displayed on the print form. The data
displayed at the part is the data selected in the record list.
The grid (one grid is approx. 1.3 mm (75 twip)) will be displayed in the print form. You can
move the parts with the mouse by the unit of the grid.
5 With the arrow parts icon selected, if you select the part, you can move the part and change its size.
6 Also, you can change the print method by right clicking the mouse cursor on the part. (This
function is only for parts with setting values.)
7 There are two types of drawing parts. Which you can use depends on the tab selected before
starting editing.
Form type: Print form straddling multiple records
Table, scattergram (trend), graph (trend), graph (overlay)
Icon Item Explanation

Arrow Used to select the positioned part.

Line This part prints a line.

Text This part prints text.

Picture This part prints a bitmap file.

Table This part prints a table.

Trend graph This part prints a trend graph.

Trend graph statistics This part prints the statistical values for a trend graph.

Graph overlay This part prints an overlay graph.

Overlay graph table This part prints a table showing the meanings of the
lines in the overlay graph.

Scatter graph This part prints a scatter graph.

Measurement analysis
conditions
This part prints the measurement analysis conditions.
Table 12-3: Form making parts list
PRINT FORMAT
Cut form type: Print form for a single record
Analysis results, image display, particle diameter frequency, particle form frequency, user
defined parameters
Icon Item Explanation

Arrow Used to select the positioned part.

Line This part prints a line.

Text This part prints text.

Picture This part prints a bitmap file.

Scatter graph This part prints a scatter graph.

Particle histogram This part prints a particle histogram.

Particle form histogram This part prints a particle form histogram.

conditions

Particle image This part prints a particle image.

Measurement results
selection display
This part prints the measurement results. The items to
be printed can be set.

conditions selection display
The items to be printed can be set.

Frequency tables This part prints a frequency table. The particle diameter
frequency or particle form frequency can be selected.

Cumulative frequency This part prints a cumulative frequency.
Table 12-4: Drawing parts table
Note: Left Click a particle image component in the print layout to select, and right click to
display the detailed information about the component. Enter a value of the maximum
page number to specify how many copies of the image will be printed.
PRINT FORMAT
Line: Property Settings
When you place the line part in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog will
be displayed.
Figure 12-8: [Line: Property Settings] dialog
Property item Functions
X1 ~ X2 Change the horizontal positions of the arrow ends by unit.
Y1 ~ Y2 Change the vertical positions of the arrow ends by unit.
Table 12-5: Plotter Parts List
NOTE: A unit is approx. 0.018 mm (1 twip).
PRINT FORMAT
Character (Label): Property Setting
When you press the character part in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog
will be displayed.
Figure 12-9: [Label: Property Setting] dialog
Input Characters Input characters to be displayed.
Character Alignment Align the input characters to Left, Right or Center.
Font Select the fonts registered in the Windows OS.
Bold Select Apply or Not Apply for the bold display.
Italic Select Apply or Not Apply for the italic display.
Font size Set the font size between 6 and 72.
Underline Select Apply or Not Apply for the underline.
Fore Color Set the fore color.
Double click on the fore color area to display the color setting
dialog.
Top Taking the upper left of the print form for origin, set the vertical
distance from the form origin to the upper left of the part.
(Hereinafter referred to as Top.)
Left Taking the upper left of the print form for origin, set the horizontal
distance from the form origin to the upper left of the part.
(Hereinafter referred to as Left.)
Height Set the vertical length of the part.
(Hereinafter referred to as Height.)
Width Set the horizontal length of the part.
(Hereinafter referred to as Width.)
Table 12-6: Label: Property Setting Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Graph (Trend-View): Property Settings
When the Graph (Trend-View) part is placed in the print form and the part is right clicked on, the
Figure 12-10: [Graph (Trend-View): Property Settings] dialog
NOTE: The unit of the Top, Left, Height and Width is approx. 0.018 mm (1 twip).
The configuration of the Top, Left, Height and Width is as follows.
Display Data Selection Select the data of the part to be displayed from X/Y axis.
Top Set the Top information on the Graph (Trend-View).
Left Set the Left information on the Graph (Trend-View).
Height Set the Height information on the Graph (Trend-View).
Width Set the Width information on the Graph (Trend-View).
Table 12-7: Graph (Trend-View): Property Settings Dialog Items
Width
Height Left
Top
Print Form
Parts
PRINT FORMAT
Picture: Property Settings
When you place the picture part in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog
will be displayed.
Figure 12-11: [Picture: Property Settings] dialog
Picture file Select the Picture file.
When the picture fie area double clicked on, the picture file
settings dialog will be displayed.
The file properties you can select are BMP, JPEG and ICO files.
Top Set the Top information on the picture part.
Left Set the Left information on the picture part.
Height Set the Height information on the picture part.
Width Set the Width information on the picture part.
Table 12-8: Picture: Property Settings Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Graph (Overlay-View): Property Settings
When you place the Graph (Overlay-View) part in the print form and the part is right clicked on,
the following dialog will be displayed.
Figure 12-12: [Graph (Overlay-View): Property Settings] dialog
Display Data Selection Select the data of the part to be displayed from Diameter
frequency distribution, Shape frequency distribution and
cumulative.
Top Set the Top information on the Graph (Overlay-View) part.
Left Set the Left information on the Graph (Overlay-View) part.
Height Set the Height information on the Graph (Overlay-View) part.
Width Set the Width information on the Graph (Overlay-View) part.
Table 12-9: Graph (Overlay-View): Property Settings Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Record List: Property Settings
When you place the record list part in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog
will be displayed.
Figure 12-13: [Record List: Property Settings] dialog
Top Set the Top information on the record list part.
Left Set the Left information on the record list part.
Height Set the Height information on the record list part.
Width Set the Width information on the record list part.
Table 12-10: Record List: Property Settings Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Scattergram: Property Settings
When you place the Scattergram part in the print form and right click on the part, the following
Figure 12-14: [Scattergram: Property Settings] dialog
Index For the document type (this type is not provided for the cut paper
type), the index of the part placed in the print form is used for
matching with the testing/analysis parameter part.
When the part is placed in the position corresponding to the index
which is the same in the Scattergram property and test/analysis
parameter, the data matching property is maintained.
Top Set the Top information on the Scattergram part.
Left Set the Left information on the Scattergram part.
Height Set the Height information on the Scattergram part.
Width Set the Width information on the Scattergram part.
Table 12-11: Scattergram: Property Settings Dialog Items
Index : 1
Index : 1
Testing/analysis
Parameter
Scattergram
Index : 2
Index : 2
Testing/analysis
Parameter
Scattergram
Same records
PRINT FORMAT
Graph (Overlay-View) Table: Property Settings
When you place the Graph (Overlay-View) table part in the print form and right click on the part,
the following dialog will be displayed.
Figure 12-15: [Graph (Overlay-View) Table: Property Settings] dialog
Top Set the Top information on the Graph (Overlay-View) table part.
Left Set the Left information on the Graph (Overlay-View) table part.
Height Set the Height information on the Graph (Overlay-View) table
part.
Width Set the Width information on the Graph (Overlay-View) table part.
Table 12-12: Graph (Overlay-View) Table: Property Settings Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Testing/Analysis Parameters: Property Settings
When you place the testing/analysis parameters part in the print form and right click on the part, the
Figure 12-16: [Testing/Analysis Parameters: Property Settings] dialog
Tested Select Display or Not Display on the part.
ReAnalyzed Select Display or Not Display on the part.
ReAnalysis Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Measurer name Select Display or Not Display on the part.
ReAnalyzed by Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Sample name Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Sample number Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Sample type Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Comment Select Display or Not Display on the part.
SOP Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Power Field Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Count method Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Sheath Liquid Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Field Lens Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Light field system Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Selection data Save Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Merging data Select Display or Not Display on the part.
Index For the document type (this type is not provided for the cut paper
type), the index of the part placed in the print form is used for
matching with the testing/analysis parameter part.
For details, refer to "Scattergram: Property Settings".
Table 12-13: Testing/Analysis Parameters: Property Settings
PRINT FORMAT
X-Axis Histogram: Property Settings
When you place the X-axis histogram part in the print form and right click on the part, the following
Figure 12-17: [X-Axis Histogram: Property Settings] dialog
Top Set the Top information on the Testing/Analysis parameter part.
Left Set the Width information on the Testing/Analysis parameter part.
Top Set the Top information on the X-axis histogram part.
Left Set the Left information on the X-axis histogram part.
Height Set the Height information on the X-axis histogram part.
Width Set the Width information on the X-axis histogram part.
Table 12-14: X-Axis Histogram: Property Settings Dialog Items
Table 12-13: Testing/Analysis Parameters: Property Settings
PRINT FORMAT
Y-Axis Histogram: Property Settings
When you place the Y-axis histogram part in the print form and right click on the part, the following
Figure 12-18: [Y-Axis Histogram: Property Settings] dialog
Top Set the Top information on the Y-axis histogram part.
Left Set the Left information on the Y-axis histogram part.
Height Set the Height information on the Y-axis histogram part.
Width Set the Width information on the Y-axis histogram part.
Table 12-15: Y-Axis Histogram: Property Settings Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Particle Image: Property Settings
When you place the particle image part in the print form and right click on the part, the following
Figure 12-19: [Particle Image: Property Settings] dialog
Property Functions
Analyzed Parameter Display Select the information displayed under the particle image from
Display or Not Display of No Parameter, X axis parameter or
Y axis parameter
Display Size Select particle image size from 2X, 4X, 8X or 10X.
Sort Select the particle image display from the order of frame, X axis
ascending frame, descending order of X axis, Y axis ascending
order Descending order of Y axis.
Number of max. print pages Set the number of printing pages.
When 0 is set to, all images can be printed.
Top Set the Top information on the particle image part.
Left Set the Left information on the particle image part.
Height Set the Height information on the particle image part.
Width Set the Width information on the particle image part.
Boundary line Select the particle image boundary line from Apply or Not Apply.
Mark Display Select from All particles, Marked particles, or No Marked
Particles. Mark particles image, No mark particles image of the
particles image list and all particles image will be shown.
Table 12-16: Particle Image: Property Settings Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Results: Property Settings
When you press the result parts in the print form and right click on the part, the following dialog
will be displayed.
Figure 12-20: [Results: Property Setting] dialog
Display Items Input analysis results to be displayed.
Character Alignment Align the input characters to Left, Right or Center.
Font Select the fonts registered in the Windows OS.
Bold Select Apply or Not Apply for the bold display.
Italic Select Apply or Not Apply for the italic display.
Font size Set the font size between 6 and 72.
Underline Select Apply or Not Apply for the underline.
Fore Color Set the fore color.
Double click on the fore color area to display the color setting
dialog.
Top Set the Top information on the result part.
Left Set the Left information on the result part.
Height Set the Height information on the result part.
Width Set the Width information on the result part.
Table 12-17: Results: Property Setting Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Frequency Table: Property Settings
When you place the frequency table part in the print form and right click on the part, the following
Figure 12-21: [Frequency Table: Property Settings] dialog
Display Data Selection Select frequency table display from Diameter / Particle frequency
distribution.
Width of display: Range Print the item list of the frequency distribution range, numbers
within the range, frequency in the range (%) and cumulation in
the range (%).
Set the width of each raw.
Width of display: Number
Width of display: Frequency
Width of display: Cumulation
Top Set the Top information on the frequency table part.
Left Set the Left information on the frequency table part.
Height Set the Height information on the frequency table part.
Width Set the Width information on the frequency table part.
Table 12-18: Frequency Table Property Settings Dialog Items
PRINT FORMAT
Settings for the cumulative frequency property
When a cumulative frequency component is allocated in print form, following dialog will be shown
if you click.
Figure 12-22: [Cumulative frequency: Property Settings] dialog
Property item
Top Set the Top information on the cumulative frequency compornent.
Left Set the Left information on the cumulative frequency compornent.
Table 12-19: Cumulative frequency propery settings dialog table.
PRINT FORMAT
Margin Settings
When you click on the area other than the part in the print form, the following dialog will be
displayed.
Figure 12-23: [Margin Settings] dialog
You can set the printing position right from the standard printing position per mm by inputting a
positive number in the column.
PRINT FORMAT
1.5 [Save New] button
Follow the procedure below to save a print format.
1 Press the [Save New] button in the Figure 12-7.
Figure 12-24: [Print Form Name Input] dialog
2 Enter the form name and click on the [OK] button.
The print format is saved.
1.6 [Delete] button
Follow the procedure below to delete a print format.
1 Select the print format to delete.
2 Press the [Delete] button.
Figure 12-25: [Deletion of Print Form] dialog
3 Press the [OK] button.
The selected component is deleted.
PRINT FORMAT
1.7 [Preview] button
Follow the procedure below to preview a print format.
1 Select the print record to view as a preview.
Figure 12-26: Print format preview
2 Press the [Preview] button.
The print preview will appear.
PRINT FORMAT
Blank page.
Chapter 13 USER AUTHENTICATION
1. User Authentication................................................................................... 13-1
1.1 Change password ............................................................................... 13-1
1.2 User Registration ................................................................................ 13-2
1.3 Lockout.............................................................................................. 13-14
1.4 Setting Default Database .................................................................. 13-14
1.5 Change logon user............................................................................ 13-15
USER AUTHENTICATION
1. User Authentication
Accounts can be set for using the FPIA-3000/3000S, with restrictions and settings for logging onto
the system.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [User Authentication].
Selecting it displays sub-menus. The following sub-menus will be displayed.
1.1 Change password
Change the logon password for the user who is currently logged on.
1 Select [Menu] [Settings] [User Authentication] [Change Password].
Figure 13-1: [Change Password] dialog
2 Enter the password and click on the [OK] button.
The password is changed.
NOTE: Logon is required when the FPIA-3000/3000S boots up.
Menu Functions
Change password Change the password for the logged-on user.
User Registration Make settings for accounts and logon.
Table 13-1: Submenu items
Item Functions
New password Enter the password to change. The input characters are displayed as
asterisks (*). Alphanumeric characters can be entered. The number of
characters which can be used is within the range set in [Edit Password/
Account] dialog. The input distinguishes between upper case and lower
case characters.
New password (Retype) Re-enter the same password entered under [New password].
Table 13-2: [Change Password] dialog items
USER AUTHENTICATION
1.2 User Registration
Accounts can be set for using the FPIA-3000/3000S, with restrictions and settings for logging onto
the system, and with group settings.
This function can only be used by users with administrator rights.
Select [Menu] [Settings] [User Authentication] [User Registration].
Figure 13-2: [User Registration] dialog
This dialog has the following three tabs.
CAUTION: This function can only be used by users with administrator rights.
Tab Functions
User Information Users can be added, edited and deleted.
Password/account Password restrictions and logon restrictions etc. can be set here.
Group setting Access groups can be set.
Table 13-3: [User Registration] dialog items
USER AUTHENTICATION
1) User Information
Creates a user account for using the FPIA-3000/3000S.
1 Select the [User Information] tab in the user settings dialog.
Figure 13-3: [User Information] dialog
Item Functions
Add Add a new account.
Edit Alter the settings for existing accounts.
Delete Delete existing accounts.
Table 13-4: [User Information] dialog items
USER AUTHENTICATION
Adding accounts
Create new accounts.
1 Press the [Add] button on the [User Information] screen.
Figure 13-4: [User Registration] dialog
USER AUTHENTICATION
2 Set the above items and click on the [OK] button.
The account is added.
Item Entry range Explanation
Logon ID Any Enter the logon ID. The input distinguishes between upper
case and lower case characters.
User Name Any Enter the user name. User names cannot be altered once
they have been registered.
Access Group Set account rights. Access groups set under group settings
can be selected.
Comments Any Enter a comment.
Password Set the password. Alphanumeric characters can be
entered. The input characters are displayed as asterisks
(*). The number of characters which can be used is within
the range set for the password account. The input
distinguishes between upper case and lower case
characters.
Password Again Re-enter the same password entered under [Password].
Default DB Any C:\ProgramFiles\FPIA-3000\name sample.rbk will be set
as default DB name where above string "name" is your
user name.
If you select [OK] button, a message dialog which states
"This file does not exist, create the file?" will be shown
when default DB does not exist. New default DB will be
created if you select [OK] button here.
Account Indefinite Disable the account without deleting the user settings.
Lockout Duration The user can log in until the date set for the account. An
expiration date warning dialog will be displayed at logon for
14 days before expiration. Once the expiration date passes,
the user will not be able to log on to the account
concerned.
Invalid Disable the account and delete the user settings.
Password
Expiring Date
Indefinite No expiration date is set for the password.
Valid With Timeout An expiration date is set for the password. It is calculated
as a number of days from the date of registration or
password alteration. An expiration date warning dialog will
be displayed on logon for 14 days before expiration. Once
the expiration date passes, the user will not be able to log
on using the password concerned.
Table 13-5: [User Registration] dialog items
USER AUTHENTICATION
Account editing
Alter the settings for existing accounts.
1 Press the [Edit] button on the [User Information] screen.
Figure 13-6: [User Information Edit] dialog
CAUTION: The account of the user currently logged on cannot be changed. The dialog below
will appear if any attempt is made to alter that account.
Figure 13-5: [User Information Edit] dialog
USER AUTHENTICATION
2 Set the above items and click on the [OK] button.
The account is edited.
Item Entry range Explanation
Logon ID Any Enter the logon ID. The input distinguishes between upper
case and lower case characters.
User Name Any Enter the user name. User names cannot be altered once
they have been registered.
Access Group Set account rights. Access groups set under group settings
can be selected.
Comments Any Enter a comment.
Password Set the password. Alphanumeric characters can be
entered. The input characters are displayed as asterisks
(*). The number of characters which can be used is within
the range set for the password account. The input
distinguishes between upper case and lower case
characters.
Password Again Re-enter the same password entered under [Password].
Default DB Any Set the database to be used by the user. However, there
must be a database in the set directory.
Account Indefinite No expiration date is set for the account.
Lockout Duration The user can log in until the date set for the account. An
expiration date warning dialog will be displayed on logon
for 14 days before expiration. Once the expiration date
passes, the user will not be able to log on to the account
concerned.
Invalid Disable the account and delete the user settings.
Password
Expiring Date
Indefinite No expiration date is set for the password.
Valid With Timeout An expiration date is set for the password. It is calculated
as a number of days from the date of registration or
password alteration. An expiration date warning dialog will
be displayed on logon for 14 days before expiration. Once
the expiration date passes, the user will not be able to log
on using the password concerned.
Reject Counts Rejected (Times) Shows the number of times in the login dialog that the user
ID or password was not input correctly so login was not
possible.
[Clear] button Pressing this button clears the reject count.
Table 13-6: [User Information Edit] dialog items
USER AUTHENTICATION
Deleting accounts
Delete existing account settings. The logged on user cannot delete his or her own settings.
1 Select the account to delete from the Edit User Information screen, then click on the [Delete]
button.
Figure 13-7: [Deletion of User] dialog
The selected account is deleted.
CAUTION: The account of the user currently logged on cannot be deleted.
USER AUTHENTICATION
2) Password/ account
Make settings for the logon stage.
1 Select the [Password/account] tab in the [User Registration] dialog.
Figure 13-8: [Password/account] dialog
Item Functions
Time-Controled Lockout Set the automatic lockout function.
Account/Lockout Settings Make settings for lockout in case of failed logon.
Password Size Set the number of characters allowed when the password is set.
Limitation of password reuse Set whether the same password can be reused when the password is
changed.
Apply Save the settings. This button is enabled if any setting has been
changed.
Cancel If the [Apply] or [OK] button have not been clicked, this restores altered
settings to their previous states.
Table 13-7: [Password/account] dialog items
USER AUTHENTICATION
Time-Controled Lockout
The system can be locked out if there is no operation of the FPIA-3000 within a certain period.
1 Select [ON] under [Time-Controled Lockout] on the [Password/account] screen.
2 Set how many minutes should elapse from the last operation before the lockout acts.
The automatic lockout is set.
The following dialog will be displayed when automatic lockout acts.
Figure 13-9: [Lockout] dialog
1 Enter the password and click on the [OK] button.
The automatic lockout is canceled.
2 If you cannot remember your password and cannot return, press the [Shutdown] button to end
the FPIA-3000 application.
Account/Lockout settings
Lockout settings can be made for cases of failed logon.
1 Select the following items under [Account/Lockout settings] on the [Password/
account] screen.
Item Functions
OFF Logon attempts will always be accepted, however many are
unsuccessful.
ON (with time restriction) Lockout the account, with a time limit.
ON (with no time restriction) Lockout the account, with no time limit.
XX times Logon error Set the allowable number of entry errors under [Logon ID], [Password]
on the Logon screen. The setting range is 1100. The number of
mistaken entries can be checked from [Reject Counts] in the [User
Information Edit] window.
XX minutes Lockout Set the lockout duration (unit: minutes) for account locks (with time
limit). The setting range is 13,600 minutes.
Table 13-8: [Account/Lockout Settings] items
USER AUTHENTICATION
Password Size
Set the number of characters which can be entered as an account password.
Limitation of Password reuse
When [Permit Password reuse.] is selected under [Limitation of password reuse] on the
[Password/account] dialog screen, reuse of passwords can be permitted even after the
expiration of the password.
Also, if [Prohibit password reuse.] is selected and an expiration date is set for user registration
and user-edited passwords, the [Password Expiration Warning] dialog is displayed at login as
in Figure 13-10 from 14 days before the password expires. If you press the button that changes
password, the [Change password] dialog is displayed as in Figure 13-11.
At this time, use of the last password is not permitted. If you input the same password, a warning
like that in Figure 13-12 is displayed.
You can set which passwords cannot be reused by inputting a count next to [Prohibit password
reuse.]. Input 1 to prohibit reuse of the current password, 2 to prohibit reuse of the current
password and the two before it.
Figure 13-10: [Password Expiration Warning] dialog
Figure 13-11: [Change Password] dialog
Figure 13-12: [Password Alteration] dialog
USER AUTHENTICATION
3) Group settings
Settings can be made for account groups, and for the actions which can be carried out by groups.
Initial registrations are made for administrator, manager and operator groups.
User groups can contain up to ten users.
1 Select the [Group setting] tab in the user settings dialog.
Figure 13-13: [Group setting] dialog
Confirmation of user group access permissions
Use the method below to check the access permission status of user groups.
1 Select the name of the group to check from the [Group List].
Check the access permissions list for the selected group.
The Access permissions list contains four tabs: [Function], [System Parameters], [SOP
Parameters] and [Sequence]. Click on the tabs to check the corresponding access permissions.
Item Functions
Function Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in the menu.
System Parameters Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in [Settings]
SOP Parameters Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in [Settings]
[SOP Parameters].
Sequence Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in
[Maintenance] [Run Sequence].
Table 13-9: [Access Permission List] items
USER AUTHENTICATION
Editing user groups
Click on the [Edit] button on the [Group setting] screen to edit group access permissions.
Figure 13-14: [Setting User Groups] dialog
Item Explanation
Group Name Change the group name.
Is group Valid? Select whether the selection in Access group list is enabled or disabled.
Function Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in the menu.
System Settings Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in [Settings]
SOP settings Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in [Settings]
[SOP Parameters].
Sequences Check marks are marked by the functions which appear in
[Maintenance] [Run Sequence].
Table 13-10: [Setting User Groups] items
USER AUTHENTICATION
1.3 Lockout
Select [Settings] [Lockout] to display the dialog below, rendering the FPIA-3000 inoperable.
Use this function to prevent anyone else from using the system.
Enter the password used to login before and click on the [OK] button to cancel the lock.
Figure 13-15: [Lockout] dialog
If you cannot remember your password and cannot return, press the [Shutdown] button to end the
FPIA-3000 application.
1.4 Setting Default Database
Select [Settings] - [User Authentication] - [Default DB] to display the default database
dialog, as shown in Figure 13-16.
Figure 13-16: [Default DB] dialog
Enter the default database folder in the edit box indicated as (A), click the [Change] button, and
the default database used at the time of log-on can be set.
If you click [Change] button, file select dialog will be shown and the user can select or change its
default DB.
(A)
USER AUTHENTICATION
1.5 Change logon user
Select [Settings]-[User Authentication] - [Change Logon User] to display following
dialog.
Figure 13-17: [Change Logon User] dialog
Enter new logon ID and password in the text box, click the [Change] button.
Configuration information of the FPIA-3000 will be changed according to given new logon ID.
USER AUTHENTICATION
Blank page.
Chapter 14 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjusting the pressure of the pneumatic unit ............................................ 14-1
1.1 Adjusting the pressure ........................................................................ 14-1
2. Adjusting the pressure of the testing unit .................................................. 14-2
2.1 Checking the pressure of the testing unit ............................................ 14-2
2.2 Pressure adjustment points................................................................. 14-3
2.3 Adjustment of rinse pressure .............................................................. 14-4
2.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure ...................................................... 14-5
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjusting the pressure of the pneumatic unit
Pressure and vacuum applied to the testing unit are supplied from the pneumatic unit. The method
for adjusting compressed air pressure is as described below.
1.1 Adjusting the pressure
The method for adjusting compressed air pressure is as described below.
1 Turn on the testing unit.
The pneumatic unit switches on.
If the pneumatic unit has been turned OFF by the timer, press the [Pneumatic Unit] button on
[Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog.
2 Check the test value of the 0.22 MPa pressure on the device status screen.
The target range is 0.220.01 MPa. If the pressure is out of the target range, make sure that the
connection tube is not bent or disconnected, then check the pressure again.
If the pressure is still not within the target range, adjust as follows.
3 Turn the fastening screw counter-clockwise.
4 Use the 0.22 MPa Regulator to adjust the pressure to approximately 0.220.01 MPa.
Turn clockwise to increase and counter-clockwise to reduce the pressure.
Figure 14-1: Checking the pneumatic unit (compressed air pressure)
5 After making the adjustment, tighten the fastening screw.
NOTE: You cannot test samples and adjust pneumatic unit pressure at the same time. Before
adjusting pneumatic unit pressure, check that no samples are being tested.
CAUTION
Always adjust the pressure upward to the specified level. When the pressure is
too high, first lower it below the specified level, then raise it.
High
Low
0.22 MPa Regulator
Fastening screw
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
2. Adjusting the pressure of the testing unit
Pressure and vacuum applied to the testing unit are supplied from the pneumatic unit.
The pressure supplied to the testing unit is readjusted to the required pressure inside the testing unit.
The adjusted pressure in the testing unit is monitored by the instrument. Unless an error relating to
pressure is displayed, there is no need for readjustment.
2.1 Checking the pressure of the testing unit
1 Select [Test] [Test].
The [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog appears.
2 Check the measured pressure values.
If the pressure is outside the normal range, adjust it as shown below.
NOTE: You cannot test samples and adjust pneumatic unit pressure at the same time.
Before adjusting pneumatic unit pressure, check that no samples are being
tested.
If a pressure-related error is displayed, check the pressure of the pneumatic
unit, then check the pressure of the testing unit.
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
2.2 Pressure adjustment points
1 Press the area labeled PUSH on the pressure regulator unit cover on the top of the testing unit,
to open the testing unit cover.
2 Check the rinse pressure adjustment regulator and the bellows pressure regulator.
Figure 14-3: Where to check the pressures
Pressure regulator unit cover
Rinse pressure adjustment
regulator
Bellows pressure regulator
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
2.3 Adjustment of rinse pressure
Check the measured rinse pressure value on the [Device Status] screen. Follow the procedure
below to adjust pressure if it is outside the target range.
1 Pull up the knob of the regulator and unlock it.
2 While confirming the pressure value on the device status screen, adjust the vacuum by turning
the knob of the regulator.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase the pressure. The value to adjust varies with the sheath
liquid used. Adjust according to the table below.
3 After completing the adjustment, press the knob back into its original position.
Dispersant Target pressure range (MPa)
PARTICLE SHEATH 0.0980.01
Methanol 0.0680.01
Ethanol 0.0980.01
Isopropanol 0.0980.01
Ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%) 0.0980.01
Table 14-1: Rinse pressure target ranges
CAUTION
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
2.4 Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure
Check the test value of the -0.05 MPa pressure on the device status screen. If the vacuum is outside
the target range, adjust as follows.
1 Loosen the fastening nut below the knob of the bellows pressure governor by turning it counter-
clockwise.
2 While confirming the -0.05 MPa pressure value on the device status screen, adjust the vacuum
by turning the knob of the bellows pressure governor. Turning the knob clockwise raises the
vacuum pressure from -0.04 towards -0.05.
Target range: -0.0530.005 MPa
Figure 14-4: -0.05 MPa pressure governor
3 After completing the adjustment, tighten the fastening screw.
CAUTION
Lock nut
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Blank page.
Chapter 15 MAINTENANCE
1. Introduction................................................................................................ 15-1
2. Executing sequences ................................................................................ 15-1
2.1 Auto rinse............................................................................................ 15-1
2.2 Revert from error................................................................................. 15-2
2.3 Manual focusing.................................................................................. 15-2
2.4 Background Check.............................................................................. 15-4
2.5 Sheath liquid exchange....................................................................... 15-5
2.6 Compressor ON.................................................................................. 15-8
2.7 Cover open/close ................................................................................ 15-8
2.8 Adjustment of the flash brightness...................................................... 15-8
2.9 Stir motor adjustment .......................................................................... 15-8
3. Changing fuses ......................................................................................... 15-9
3.1 Changing the fuse in the testing unit ................................................... 15-9
3.2 Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit........................................... 15-10
3.3 Periodic Replacement Parts.............................................................. 15-11
4. Help......................................................................................................... 15-11
4.1 Table of Contents.............................................................................. 15-11
4.2 Version information ........................................................................... 15-11
MAINTENANCE
1. Introduction
This chapter explains device maintenance. Refer to the following titles as necessary.
Executing Sequences
This explains the various sequences required for device maintenance.
Replacement of supplies
This explains the methods for replacing supply parts that require periodic replacement.
2. Executing sequences
This section explains how to execute sequences. There are ten types of sequence for device
maintenance.
2.1 Auto rinse
Auto rinsing is used when rinsing the fluid system of the testing unit.
1 Select [Maintenance] [Sequence] [Auto Rinse].
Sequence name Purpose
Auto Rinse Used for rinsing the fluid unit.
Revert from error Used when an error has occurred during a sequence.
Manual focusing Used for manual focusing.
Auto Focusing Used for automatic focusing. Refer to Chapter 3.
Background check Used for testing background values for the device.
Sheath liquid exchange Used to replace sheath liquid.
Compresson ON Used to cancel the pneumatic unit timer.
Cover open/close Used to manually open and close the cover.
Adjjustment of the flash brightness Used to adjust stroboscope brightness.
Stir motor adjustment Used to adjust the speed of the mixing motor.
Table 15-1: Names of sequences and their purposes
CAUTION
When measuring highly adhesive particles or samples with high particle
concentrations, check to make sure that there is no carryover. Ordinary
rinsing may not be sufficient. When there is carryover, perform the
automatic rinsing sequence.
MAINTENANCE
2.2 Revert from error
When the testing unit status signal is red, indicating that the unit cannot run tests, it is necessary to
perform the Revert from error sequence.
There are two ways of reverting from errors: Executing this sequence or reverting from the
[Recover] screen.
The latter method should usually be used. Refer to Chapter 7, 1. Error messages for the method.
When you choose [Recover], you revert from the error automatically.
If you still cannot revert from the error, refer to Chapter 7, 3. Error messages and troubleshooting.
2.3 Manual focusing
There are two ways of focusing: automatic and manual.
The manual method is explained here. For how to auto focus, refer to Chapter 3, 3.4 Auto Focusing.
1 Select [Maintenance] [Sequence] [Manual focusing].
The dialog below appears, and the initial process begins.
Figure 15-1: [Manual Focus Sequence] dialog
2 When pre-processing is finished, the following dialog appears.
Figure 15-2: Waiting for start test dialog
MAINTENANCE
3 Dispense 5ml of a sample prepared to focus adjusting particle into the sample chamber, as
instructed by the action message. About focus adjusting particle, refer to Appendix F, FOCUS
ADJUSTING SAMPLE.
4 Press the [Start] button. Manual focus adjustment sequence starts, and after a while, particle
images will be displayed on the screen.
Check the images and click , , and buttons to adjust focus. Click on and
to move the flow cell by the minimum distance in the direction of the arrow. Click on and
to move by five times the distance produced by clicking on and .
Figure 15-3: [Manual Focus Sequence] dialog
CAUTION
Since the captured particle images displayed in a real-time are observed
with eyes to make focus adjustment in the manual focus adjustment
sequence, an individual variation and an adjustment error will occur.
If a correct analysis result is required, perform the auto focus adjustment
sequence after the manual focus adjustment sequence has been
completed.
MAINTENANCE
2.4 Background Check
1 Select [Maintenance] [Sequence] [Background check].
Figure 15-4: [Start Background Test] dialog
2 Click on the [Run] button.
A background check will be carried out.
When a background check is finished, the following dialog appears.
Figure 15-5: [Background Check Results] dialog
3 To repeat a background check, click on the [Run] button.
MAINTENANCE
2.5 Sheath liquid exchange
1 Click the [Replace Sheath Liquid] button in the testing/analysis condition screen, and the
sheath replacing sequence will start.
Figure 15-6: Starting the sheath fluid replacing sequence
2 Since the following dialog will be displayed to prompt a selection of the sheath fluid, click the
button to select a desired sheath fluid, disconnect the sheath fluid tube on the rear panel, and
connect the selected sheath fluid to the sheath inlet nipple.
Figure 15-7: Selecting a sheath fluid (Sheath fluid replacing sequence)
NOTE: The sheath fluid replacing sequence can be also started by selecting [Menu] -
[Maintenances] - [Sequences] - [Sheath liquid exchange].
MAINTENANCE
3 After connecting the sheath fluid, click the [Run] button in the dialog.
The sheath fluid primed in the testing unit will be started to exhaust.
When the exhausting the sheath fluid is completed, the following dialog will be displayed to
prompt an adjustment of the rinse pressure.
Figure 15-8: Adjustment of the rinse pressure dialog
4 Adjust the rinse pressure regulator so that the measured value becomes the target value. After
adjusting the rinse pressure, click the [Run] button in the dialog.
The hydraulic system is rinsed by the connected sheath fluid, and the sheath fluid is then primed.
When priming the sheath fluid is completed, the sheath fluid box shown below will display the
sheath fluid name that is connected and primed.
CAUTION
It is recommended to replace the Teflon tube between the sheath inlet
nipple and the sheath container to avoid contamination of the sheath
fluid. In this case, cut the provided Teflon tube 4 mmID x 6 mmOD in an
appropriate length to use.
There is a potential to generate heat or poisonous gas when the
previous waste in the waste tank is chemically reacted with the new
sheath fluid. It is recommended to replace by a new waste tank when the
sheath fluid is replaced by a new type.
Cap the disconnected sheath fluid container, and store in a safe place.
Discard the waste in the waste tank in accordance with the laboratorys,
local and government regulations.
CAUTION
There is a potential to generate heat or poisonous gas when the
previous waste in the waste tank is chemically reacted with the new
sheath fluid. When a dialog shown in Figure 15-8 is displayed, replace
by a new waste tank.
MAINTENANCE
Figure 15-9: Displaying the sheath fluid name
5 After the sheath fluid priming is completed, the testing unit becomes ready.
CAUTION
Depending on the physical characteristics of the newly connected
sheath fluid, there may be a case that the new sheath fluid is mixed with
residual sheath fluid in the testing unit hydraulic system and emulsify
(emulsion). When the sheath fluid turned emulsion, the analysis result is
drastically affected since the emulsion is detected as particles. When a
different polar sheath fluid is to be replaced, use the [sheath fluid
replacing] sequence to replace one by an intermediate solvent to
prevent sheath from turning into emulsion. For example, when the
PARTICLE SHEATH is desired to replace by toluene, it is effective to
use an intermediate solvent of ethanol or 2-propanol to avoid emulsion.
PARTICLE SHEATH
Intermediate solvent (ethanol)
Intermediate solvent (ethanol)
1st step: PARTICLE SHEATH
2nd step: toluene
toluene
MAINTENANCE
2.6 Compressor ON
1 Select [Maintenance] [Sequence] [Compressor ON].
The pneumatic unit timer is cancelled. The timer can also be cancelled by clicking on the
[Pneumatic Unit] button on the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] screen.
2.7 Cover open/close
1 Select [Test] [Cover Open/Close]. The cover opens. Click on [Cover Open/close] again
to close the cover.
2.8 Adjustment of the flash brightness
1 Select [Maintenance] [Sequence] [Adjustment of the flash brightness].
The stroboscope brightness is automatically adjusted to an optimized value.
2.9 Stir motor adjustment
1 Select [Maintenance] [Sequence] [Stir motor adjustment].
The rpm of the mixing motor is automatically adjusted to an optimized value.
MAINTENANCE
3. Changing fuses
3.1 Changing the fuse in the testing unit
Fuses used in the Main unit
Fuses used in the Pneumatic unit
If the testing unit does not operate even after turning it on, check if the fuse is blown.
1 Turn off the testing unit power switch, and unplug the power cable that is connected to the
testing unit.
2 Find the fuse holder at the back of the device. Use a minus (-) screwdriver to raise the clip of the
fuse holder on the back of the testing unit and detach it from the unit.
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, disconnect the power cord before servicing.
There is a potential of an electric shock.
Replace only with fuse of the specified type and current ratings. There is
a risk of fire.
Specification Part No. Name Type
117 VAC 266-5109-1 Fuse 250V, 3.15A, ST4-3.15A-N1 Time lag
220/240 VAC 266-5303-3 Fuse 250V, 25A, No.19195 Time lag
Specification Part No. Name Type
117 VAC 266-5011-3 Fuse 250 V, 4A, ST4-4A-N1 Time lag
220/240 VAC 266-5293-0 Fuse 250 V, 3.15 A, No.19195 Time lag
Table 15-2: Fuse types
CAUTION
When changing a fuse, be sure to check its capacity.
If the fuse still blows right after you turn on the device, there may be
something wrong with the device. Please contact your Sysmex service
representative for an inspection.
MAINTENANCE
Figure 15-10: Changing the fuse in the testing unit
3 Check if the fuse is blown.
If the fuse is blown, replace it with the accessory fuse.
4 Connect the fuse in the original fuse position.
5 Connect the power cord.
3.2 Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit
1 Turn off the testing unit power switch, and unplug the power cable that is connected to the
pneumatic unit.
2 Find the fuse holder at the back of the pneumatic unit. Use a minus (-) screwdriver to raise the
clip of the fuse holder on the back of the testing unit, and detach it from the unit.
Figure 15-11: Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit
3 Check if the fuse is blown.
If the fuse is blown, replace it with the accessory fuse.
4 Connect the fuse in the original fuse position.
5 Connect the power cord.
MAINTENANCE
3.3 Periodic Replacement Parts
The dialog below is displayed via [Maintenance] [Parts Maintenance].
Figure 15-12: [Replacement Of Supply Parts] dialog
You can check the replacement date status for the parts replaced periodically: air filter, syringe
seal, and pinch valve tube.
The time to replace a part comes, an announcement dialog like the one in the figure below is
displayed in the logon dialog during logon. These parts are replaced by staff from this company, so
please contact the staff responsible for service.
Figure 15-13: [Replacement Of Supply Parts] dialog
This dialog appears only for warning.
Pressing the [Close] button closes the announce dialog and the system operates normally.
4. Help
4.1 Table of Contents
Select [Help]-[Contents] to view PDF files of the FPIA-3000/3000S.
4.2 Version information
Select [Help]-[Version information] to show version information of the installed FPIA-3000.
MAINTENANCE
Blank page.
Chapter 16 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1. Testing principles ...................................................................................... 16-1
2. Image processing...................................................................................... 16-2
3. Particle analysis ........................................................................................ 16-3
4. Statistical analysis ..................................................................................... 16-5
5. List of display items ................................................................................... 16-7
5.1 Particle diameter parameters.............................................................. 16-7
5.2 Form parameters................................................................................. 16-8
5.3 Other test data .................................................................................... 16-9
5.4 Statistical analysis items ..................................................................... 16-9
5.5 Analysis data..................................................................................... 16-10
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1. Testing principles
The FPIA-3000/3000S tests particle images with the imaging flow cytometry and performs various
particle analysises.
Imaging flow cytometry means picking up flowing particles as a still image for the purpose of
image analysis. The following is an overview of how the system works.
1) A sample supplied to the sample chamber is fed into a flat sheath flow cell by the sample
aspiration syringe.
2) The sample that has been fed into the flat sheath flow cell forms a highly laminar flow,
surrounded by sheath liquid.
3) A strobe light is flashed on the sample running through the flat sheath flow cell every 1/60
second. The duration of the stroboscope flash is very short, around 2s, so that moving particles
can be captured as still images. The flow of the sample is very flat so that almost all the particles
in it can be seen in focus.
4) The particles are captured with a CCD camera and the captured images are processed in the
image-processing unit. In the image-processing unit, the edge of each particle observed is
extracted for calculation of the projected area and cut-out size of the particle.
5) After testing is complete, the inside of the instrument is automatically rinsed and the sample,
together with the sheath liquid, is drained to the waste chamber.
Figure 16-1: Sample flow
1
2
4
5
3
Mixing motor
Mixing propeller
CCD camera
To the image-
processing unit
Rinse chamber
Objective
lens
Waste chamber
Sample chamber
Flat sheath
flow cell
Sheath formation
syringe
Light source of
stroboscope
Sample aspiration
syringe
2. Image processing
The CCD camera for the FPIA-3000/3000S sends an analog signal of the frame image to the image-
processing unit. The image processing unit observes each particle from frame images and cut out
the particle image.
(1) Digitizing the Image
The image-processing unit converts the analog signal to an 8-bit digital signal (digitization),
and stores it in the digital memory.
(2) Smoothing processing
The image may include irregular noise as though sprinkled with tiny flakes. Processing is
executed that reduces this noise by applying a smoothing filter.
(3) Shading correction with background image
Processing is executed that uses the background image to correction shading occurring in the
background.
(4) Edge emphasis processing
The edges of the image (boundaries between light and dark areas) are sharpened so that even
low-contrast particles can be captured.
(5) Binarizing the particle image
Particle images are binarized, dividing the whole image into bright and dark portions.
Binarization is the expression of these two portions as two values, 1 and 0, respectively.
(6) Edge Tracing the Particle Image
This traces the edge of the particle image, cuts out the particle image, and finds the size and
position of the particle.
The particle image and information cut out by the image processing unit are sent to the data
processing unit, which analyses it, calculating the particle diameter and form parameters.
3. Particle analysis
This section explains the method by which image analysis is carried out on all the particle image
sent from the image processing unit and the particle diameter and form parameters calculated.
(1) Smoothing filter
Noise is reduced by applying the smoothing filter. The default is processing by the median
filter. You can also select between two average filters.
Median filter
This filter sorts the brightness values for the 3x3 area around the subject pixel and replaces
the brightness value with the median brightness value of the area.
Average filter
This filter replaces the brightness value with the average brightness value of the 3x3 area
around the subject pixel Two operators are set for weighting the area around the center.
Option 1 operator
Option 2 operator
(2) Shading compensation with background image
Processing is executed that uses the background image to correction shading occurring in the
background.
(3) Edge emphasis filter
This executes processing that emphasizes the edge of the particle image. A Laplacian filter is
used as the edge emphasis filter. You can select from among three operators for the 3x3 area
around each pixel, the standard operator and the two optional operators.
Standard operator
Option 1 operator
1/10 1/10 1/10
1/10 2/10 1/10
1/10 1/10 1/10
1/16 2/16 1/16
2/16 4/16 2/16
1/16 2/16 1/16
0 -1/4 0
-1/4 1 -1/4
0 -1/4 0
-1/8 -1/8 -1/8
-1/8 1 -1/8
-1/8 -1/8 -1/8
Option 2 operator
(4) Binarizing the particle image
Particle images are binarized, dividing the whole image into bright and dark portions.
The binarization threshold is calculated with the following equation.
Binarization threshold = background image most frequent brightness A (%) + B
A: Binarization threshold setting value A
B: Binarization threshold setting value B
The image and background areas are divided based on this threshold.
(5) Calculating parameters
The particle and form parameters of 5.1 and 5.2 are calculated from the binarized particle
image.
1/4 -2/4 1/4
-2/4 1 -2/4
1/4 -2/4 1/4
4. Statistical analysis
This section explains the statistical analysis using the particle image parameters obtained by
analyzing the particle image.
(1) Calculation of the two-dimensional frequency data
The number of particles within each divided range of the two-dimensional scattergram in which
the circular diameters are assigned to the X axis and the circularities are assigned to the Y axis
is calculated.
Values obtained by log-conversion of the circular diameters of the tested particles are used for
the X axis, and the 0.5-200 m range is divided into 1,024 to calculate the frequency. For
circularity, the range of 0.2-1.0 is divided into 800 parts.
(2) Frame correction
Only those particles completely within the frame area captured are counted. The probability of
a particle being included within the frame area is inversely proportional to the size of the
particle. The larger the particle, the greater the possibility of being on the edge of the frame
area. Frequencies are corrected taking these probabilities into account.
(3) Calculation of distribution frequency data
Values obtained by log-conversion of the circular diameters of the tested particles are used for
the X axis. The 0.5-200 m range is divided into 1024 to calculate the frequency. In the case of
number, the number of particles (f0i) whose circular diameters d1 are within the range of di
to di + 1 is calculated. In the case of volume, the total volume (f3i) of particles whose circular
diameters are within the range of di to di + 1 is calculated.
(4) Calculation of form frequency data
With the circularity as the Y axis, the range from 0.2 to 1.0 is divided into 1024 to calculate the
frequency.
(5) Calculation of statistical analysis items
The statistical analysis items of 5.4 are calculated from the particle frequency data and the
particle form data.
(6) Calculation of the analysis data
The analysis data of 5.5 is calculated from the 2-dimensional frequency data.
(7) Computation of 2-dimensional frequency data in Merge(LPF+HPF) mode.
In full range mode, superposition of 2-dimentional frequency data is calculated following
method.
Limit parameter and sample quantum are different between LPF mode and HPF mode.
Therefore, these frequency data cannot be simply added. Frequency conversion for different
sample quantum is calculated and frequency correction in the overlapped measuring range is
calculated.
Frequency conversion for different sample quantum
Since HPF quantum is different from LPF quantum, compensation of the frequency of HPF
measured data into frequency of LPF quantum is needed.
F
H
=
H
x (V
L
/ V
H
)
Frequency correction in the overlapped measuring range
When connecting up frequency data of HPF mode to LPF mode, particle size distribution
curve is not shown correctly because of the overlapping of the measured range. To solve this
problem, use this formula.
F
LH
= F
H
x {1-(
i
-MIN) / (MAX-MIN)} + F
L
x {1-(MAX-
i
) / (MAX-MIN)}
F
LH
: LPF/HPF frequency
F
H
: HPF frequency(after conversion)
F
L
: LPF frequency
f
H
: HPF frequency
V
H
: HPF quantum
V
L
: LPF quantum
MAX : upper limit of the overlapped measure range
MIN : lower limit of the overlapped measure range.
5. List of display items
5.1 Particle diameter parameters
Analysis
parameters
Symbols Units Calculation
methods
Explanation
CE Diameter D H m 2*(S/)
1/2
The diameter of the circle having the same
projected area as the particle image.
Max. Distance D max m Measured
value
The greatest distance between two points
on the edge of the particle image.
Norm to max dist DV-max m Measured
value
When the image is bounded by two straight
lines parallel to the maximum length, this is
the shortest perpendicular length between
the two straight lines.
Length L m Measured
value
The length of the longer axis when the
particle image is bounded by two pairs of
parallel lines.
Width B m Measured
value
The length of the shorter axis when the
particle image is bounded by two pairs of
parallel lines.
Feret H Diameter D H-Feret
(Horizontal)
m Measured
value
The direct linear diameter, defined as the
horizontal distance between two pairs of
parallel lines which bound the particle.
Feret V Diameter D V-Feret
(Vertical)
m Measured
value
The direct linear diameter, defined as the
vertical distance between two pairs of
parallel lines which bound the particle.
Martin H Diameter D H-Martin
(Horizontal)
m Measured
value
The length of the horizontal line which
bisects the area of the particle.
Martin V Diameter D V-Martin
(Vertical)
m Measured
value
The length of the vertical line which bisects
the area of the particle.
Krumbein H
Diameter
D H-Krumbein
(Horizontal)
m Measured
value
The length of largest cut side when the
particle is cut horizontally.
Krumbein V
Diameter
D V-Krumbein
(Vertical)
m Measured
value
The length of largest cut side when the
particle is cut vertically.
PE Diameter D L m C/ The diameter of the circle having the same
circumference as the particle image.
Area(pixcels) St pixels Measured
value
number of pixels including outline and
interior of particle.
Perimeter C m Measured
value
Length of the particle perimeter
Area S m
2
Measured
value
Particle area
Convex Hull
perimeter
C envelope m Measured
value
Peripheral length of the shape joining the
projections on the particle.
Table 16-1: Particle diameter parameters
5.2 Form parameters
Convex Hull area S envelope m
2
Measured
value
Area of the shape joining the projections on
the particle.
Analysis param-
eters
methods
Explanation
Circularity HL 2(S )
1/2
/C The ratio between the circumference
of a circle with the same areas as the
projected area and the peripheral
length of the projected image.
Intensity Mean MI Measured value Average brightness of pixels in the
area of the particle.
Intensity SD ISD Measured value Standard deviation of brightness of
pixels in the area of the particle.
Feret Aspect ratio RD-Feret Ratio of Feret
diameters
(maximum = 1.0)
The aspect ratio of the horizontal
rectangle tangent on the outside of the
particle.
Area/Box RS-Feret S/(D H-Feret
D V-Feret)
The ratio of the particle area to the
area of the tangent rectangle.
Expresses the rectangularity of the
particle.
Aspect ratio
(W/L)
RD-MajorAxis B/L The ratio between Length and width.
This means the spicular level.
Elongation EL 1-B/L Expresses the slenerness of the
particle.
Aspect ratio
(max dist)
R aspect D v-max/D max The ratio of the largest perpendicular
length to the longest length.
Expresses the spicularity of the
particle.
Solidity envelope S/S envelope Level of irregularity relative to the
envelope.
Convexity R envelope C envelope/C Level of irregularity relative to the
envelope.
HS circularity
HS
4xxS/L
2
The ratio of an area of the circle that
projected area of the particle image
and peripheral length are same.
Major axis
L
deg Measured value Direction where particle has
expanded.
Table 16-2: Form parameters
Analysis
parameters
methods
Explanation
Table 16-1: Particle diameter parameters
5.3 Other test data
5.4 Statistical analysis items
Analysis
parameters
methods
Explanation
Detected (#) Number Measured value The total number of particles
among all those detected by the
image processing board during the
test that are above the minimum
number of pixels.
Analyzed (#) Number Measured value The total number of validly
analyzed particles among those
transferred from the image
processing board to the PC.
Density
particles/
mL
Measured value Shows the particle concentration in
the sample as the number of
particles per l.
Analyzed volume L Expresses the volume of sampling
sample in the testing.
Table 16-3: Other test data
Analysis
parameters
Symbols Calculation methods Explanation
Average Mean
di: Mean value of data in
the i-th channel.
Fni: Mean value of data in
the i-th channel.
The total of particle parameters in the
range between Ldiscrete and Udiscrete
divided by the total frequency.
Mode Mode The highest frequency value in the range
from Ldiscrete to Udiscrete.
SD value SD

Standard deviation in the range from
Ldiscrete to Udiscrete.
CV CV% SD/Mean100 Coefficient of variation in the range from
Ldiscrete to Udiscrete.
50% value 50% The parameter value at which the
cumulative frequency in the range from
Ldiscrete to Udiscrete reaches 50%.
Table 16-4: Statistical analysis items
(di x f
u
i-1
fni
u
i=1
(di - Mean)
2
x fni
u
i-1
(fni - 1)
u
i-1
1
2
5.5 Analysis data
Upper% value Upper% The parameter value at which the
Ldiscrete to Udiscrete reaches Upper%.
Lower% value Lower% The parameter value at which the
Ldiscrete to Udiscrete reaches Lower%.
Analysis
parameters
Selected (#) Number Same as the number of
medium particles
When particle limits are used within the
scattergram and the numbers of large,
medium and small particles are defined
as below, the ratios are calculated using
the formulae on the left.
Selected (%) % No. of limited particles/No. of
analyzed particles 100
Large (%) % No. of large particles/(No. of
large particles + No. of
medium particles + No. of
small particles) 100
Middle (%) % No. of medium particles/(No.
of large particles + No. of
Small (%) % No. of small particles/(No. of
large particles + No. of
Table 16-5: Analysis data
Analysis
parameters
Table 16-4: Statistical analysis items
Ldiscrete
Ldiscrete
Udiscrete
Udiscrete
Medium
particles
Large
particles
Small
particles
APPENDIX A INSTALLATION
1. Preparation for installation...........................................................................A-1
1.1 Accessories...........................................................................................A-1
1.2 Place and space for installation ............................................................A-5
1.3 Exterior dimensions...............................................................................A-7
2. Installation ...................................................................................................A-8
2.1 Dismantling the fastener for transportation ...........................................A-8
2.2 Mounting the Filter Assembly No. 24 (FPIA-3000S) ...........................A-15
2.3 Connecting the tubes ..........................................................................A-17
2.4 Connecting the power cables and connection cables.........................A-22
2.5 Grounding ...........................................................................................A-25
2.6 Installing the analysis PC....................................................................A-26
3. Installation of Acrobat Reader ...................................................................A-30
INSTALLATION
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 A-1
1. Preparation for installation
The FPIA-3000/3000S consists of the testing unit, data processing unit, CRT monitor, pneumatic
unit and accessories. Upon delivery, check that you have all components and that they are free of
visible damage, referring to 1.1 Accessories.
personnel from your dealer or a Sysmex office.
1.1 Accessories
Contents of accessories (FPIA-3000 100 V-type)
Testing unit accessories
Part code Description Quantity
923-8092-8 Power cable 1
053-0495-1 Cord No. 3543 (USB 2.0 cable) 1
461-2139-2 FPIA-3000/3000S Operators Manual 1
844-0122-8 Dispenser set 1
043-2951-1 FPIA-3000 CD-ROM 1
442-5289-1 Silicon tube (6 4) 3 m
442-5338-7 Urethane tube (4 6) 20 m
442-5340-5 Urethane tube (9 6) 10 m
442-5055-4 Urethane tube (3.4 1.8) 1 m
442-5451-1 Teflon tube (1.5 2.3) 1 m
266-4461-8 Tie wrap 10
348-3954-2 Screw (M5 10) 1
442-3361-6 Rubber joints (No. 21) 2
462-2852-7 Hexagonal wrench 1
462-2381-8 Philips screwdriver (large) 1
462-2423-7 Pliers 1
342-3845-0 Mixing belt (MBM2-160) 1
344-5612-8 Lens mounting screw (screw No.31) 1
421-9128-5 Lens holder (No.44B) 1
421-2601-7 Objective lens 1
462-3122-1 Cubitainer cap opener 1
266-5109-1 Testing unit fuses 2
INSTALLATION
A-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005
Pneumatic unit accessories
Contents of accessories (FPIA-3000 200V-type)
Testing unit accessories
Pneumatic unit accessories
266-5011-3 Pneumatic unit fuses 1
Table A-1: Accessories (100 V-type)
265-9360-0 USB 2.0 cable 1
461-2139-2 FPIA-3000/3000S Operators Manual 1
844-0122-8 Dispenser set 1
043-2951-1 FPIA-3000 CD-ROM 1
442-5289-1 Silicon tube (6 4) 3 m
442-5338-7 Urethane tube (6 4) 20 m
442-5340-5 Urethane tube (9 6) 10 m
442-5055-4 Urethane tube (3.4 1.8) 1 m
442-5451-1 Teflon tube (1.5 2.3) 1 m
266-4461-8 Tie wrap 10
348-3954-2 Screw (M5 10) 1
442-3361-6 Rubber joints (No. 21) 2
462-2852-7 Hexagonal wrench 1
462-2381-8 Philips screwdriver (large) 1
462-2423-7 Pliers 1
342-3845-0 Mixing belt (MBM2-160) 1
344-5612-8 Lens mounting screw (screw No. 31) 1
421-9128-5 Lens holder (No. 44B) 1
421-2601-7 Objective lens 1
462-3122-1 Cubitainer cap opener 1
266-5304-3 Testing unit fuses 2
266-5293-0 Pneumatic unit fuses 2
Table A-2: Accessories (200 V-type)
INSTALLATION
Contents of accessories (FPIA-3000S)
Testing Unit accessories
Part code No. Description Quantity
100-120V 200-240V
461-2139-2 FPIA-3000 Operators Manual 1 1
043-2951-1 FPIA-3000 Software CD-ROM 1 1
923-8092-8 Power cord No. 15 1 -
265-4731-5 Power cord (4622-007-0092) - 1
053-0495-1 Wiring Cord No. 3543 (USB 2.0 cable) 1 1
844-0122-8 Dispenser set (CS-61) 1 1
266-4461-8 Tie Wrap 10 10
462-2852-7 Hexagonal wrench 1 1
462-2381-8 Philips screwdriver (large) 1 1
462-2423-7 Pliers 1 1
462-3122-1 Cubitainer Cap Opener 1 1
348-3954-2 Screw (M5 x 10) 1 1
342-3845-0 Mixer belt (MBM2-160) 1 1
346-6577-2 Seal No. 27 2 2
344-7548-3 Nut No. 47 4 4
442-3809-9 Hydraulic connector No. 69 1 1
442-5442-8 Tube Teflon 4mmID x 6mmOD 10 m 10 m
442-5338-7 Tube Polyurethane 4mmID x 6mmOD 10 m 10 m
442-5055-4 Tube Polyurethane 1.8mm x 3.4mm 1 m 1 m
442-5451-1 Tube Teflon 1.5mmID x 2.3mmOD 1 m 1 m
442-8514-0 Tubing No. 114 1 1
442-8515-3 Tubing No. 115 1 1
442-8516-7 Tubing No. 116 1 1
442-8517-1 Tubing No. 117 1 1
442-8518-4 Tubing No. 118 1 1
442-8519-8 Tubing No. 119 1 1
442-8520-2 Tubing No. 120 1 1
442-8521-6 Tubing No. 121 1 1
442-8523-3 Tubing No. 123 1 1
442-8524-7 Tubing No. 124 1 1
442-8550-4 Tubing No. 125 1 1
Table A-3: Accessories
INSTALLATION
Pneumatic unit accessories (FPIA-3000S)
442-8551-8 Tubing No. 126 1 1
442-8552-1 Tubing No. 127 1 1
442-8553-5 Tubing No. 128 1 1
442-8554-9 Tubing No. 129 1 1
442-5633-5 O-ring Perfluoro-elastomer
VS-1 2mmID x 5mmOD x 30mm
2 2
442-5632-1 O-ring Perfluoro-elastomer
VS-1 1mmID x 3mmOD x 50mm
1 1
344-5612-8 Lens mounting screw (screw No.31) 1 1
421-9128-5 Lens holder No.44B 1 1
421-2602-1 Objective lens 1 1
053-2281-0 Filter Assembly No. 24 1 1
348-3953-9 Screw M5 x 8 2 2
266-5109-1 Fuses (ST4-3.15A-N1) 2 -
266-5304-3 Fuses (250 V 2.5 A) - 2
100-120V 200-240V
923-8092-8 Power cord No. 15 1 -
265-4731-5 Power cord (4622-007-0092) - 1
266-5011-3 Fuses (ST4-4A-N1) 2 -
266-5293-0 Fuses (250 V 3.15 A) - 2
100-120V 200-240V
INSTALLATION
1.2 Place and space for installation
The FPIA-3000/3000S is a precision instrument. Therefore, take into account the ambient
temperature, humidity, dust, vibration, water leakage, power, sunlight, peripheral space, grounding,
etc. when choosing an installation place.
WARNING
When a flammable organic solvent is used, install the instrument in a
fireless place. There is a potential to get fire or explosion when
evaporated gas catches fire.
When a flammable organic solvent is used, install the fire extinguisher
suitable for the organic solvent.
When the organic solvent is used, ventilate the instrument circumference
by installing a local ventilation device. There is a potential to get fire or
explosion when evaporated gas catches fire. There is also a potential to
expose to the toxic material.
INSTALLATION
A-6 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
CAUTION
For efficient use of the device, observe the following precautions.
Temperature
Avoid extreme temperatures, whether low or high.
Use the instrument in an ambient temperature of 15 to 30C.
Humidity
Avoid places subject to water splashes, e.g., the vicinity of a sink, and
highly humid places.
Use the instrument under a humidity of 30 to 85%.
Dust
Avoid dusty places, e.g., the vicinity of a blackboard, windows, etc.
Vibration
Install the device on a vibration-free, flat and sturdy desk or table.
Water Leakage
Do not put a water-filled container on the device.
Water leaking into the device can cause malfunction.
Power supply
Rated voltage: AC100 V10%
Frequency: 50/601 Hz
Do not share the same outlet with noise-generating equipment such as a
centrifugal separator, ultrasonic cleaner or thermostat. Also, keep a
distance of at least 2 m from such equipment.
The instrument must be installed with a ground connection. Refer to
Appendix A, 2.5 Grounding for details of the grounding method.
Sunlight
Avoid locations that are subject to direct sunlight or are below
incandescent lights.
Location
The FPIA-3000 has a fan at the rear. Ensure a space of at least 20 cm
between the rear of the device and the wall so as not to interfere with
ventilation. To facilitate maintenance and servicing, leave space of at
least 50cm on the sides and above the top surface.
Data processing PC
Confirm that the resolution of the screen is 1280 1024 pixels with
[Display Properties].
Confirm that all the settings within [Power Settings] are not set to
automatically turn OFF with the [Power Options Properties].
Please uncheck the box of the item (Animate the windows when
minimized and maxmizing) whitch is in the [Advanced]-[Performance
Options] in the System Properties of Controlpanel.
Use the time and date set in the region and language option of Control
panel by default.
INSTALLATION
1.3 Exterior dimensions
The exterior dimensions of the instrument are stated below.
Figure A-1: Exterior dimensions of the FPIA-3000/3000S
Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm)
Testing unit Approx. 900 Approx. 475 Approx. 455
Pneumatic unit Approx. 280 Approx. 355 Approx. 400
Table A-5: Exterior dimensions
INSTALLATION
2. Installation
2.1 Dismantling the fastener for transportation
1. How to unfasten the pneumatic unit compressor
1 Use the screwdriver provided to undo the four fastening screws on the underside of the
pneumatic unit.
The compressor inside will be unfastened.
Figure A-2: How to unfasten the compressor
INSTALLATION
2. How to remove the fastener for transporting the testing unit
1 Lift the cover of the testing unit by hand and remove the two fastening screws.
Figure A-3: Remove the testing unit covers
2 Remove the testing unit covers and return the drive unit to its place.
Figure A-4: Return the drive unit to its place
Testing unit cover
Drive unit
INSTALLATION
3 Remove the two fastening screws holding the central cover.
Figure A-5: Remove the central cover fastening screws
4 Lift the central cover slightly and detach the LED cable which is connected to the back of the
cover.
Figure A-6: Detach the LED cable
5 Remove the central cover by pulling it upwards.
Figure A-7: Remove the central cover
LED cable
Central cover
INSTALLATION
6 Remove the fastening screws holding the right cover (two screws on top, two behind).
Figure A-8: Undo the right cover fastening screws
7 Remove the fastening screws holding the right cover (two on the right).
Figure A-9: Remove the right cover fastening screws
INSTALLATION
8 Remove the right cover by pulling it upwards.
Figure A-10: Remove the right cover
9 Remove the eight fastening screws holding the shade cover.
Figure A-11: Remove the shade cover fastening screws
Right cover
Shade cover
INSTALLATION
10 Remove the shade cover.
Figure A-12: Remove the shade cover
11 Attach the objective lens provided to the lens holder.
Figure A-13A: Attach the objective lens
Remove the two M3 6 fastening screws and remove the fastening plate for shipping.
Figure A-13B: Remove the fastening plate for shipping
Shade cover
Lens holder
Objective lens
Fastening plate for shipping
Two M3 6 fastening screws
INSTALLATION
12 Fit the lens holder into the testing unit so that the portion with no corners is innermost.
13 Use the lens holder fastening screw to fasten the lens holder.
Figure A-14: Fasten the lens holder.
14 Remove the relay lens unit fastening screws (M5 60) and replace it with the screw provided
(M5 10).
Figure A-15: Exchange the screws
15 Return the covers to their original positions.
Lens holder fastening screw
Lens holder
INSTALLATION
2.2 Mounting the Filter Assembly No. 24 (FPIA-3000S)
In the FPIA-3000S, the Filter Assembly No. 24 is installed on the rear panel to filter the organic
solvent gas in the vacuum line to prevent any gas flowing into the pneumatic unit PU-17
compressor. Activated charcoal cartridge in the filter will adsorb gases.
1 Install the provided Filter Assembly No. 24 on the rear panel using the provided two screws
binding M5x8.
Figure A-16: Fixing the Filter Assembly No. 24
2 Connect the two tubes (1 each of Teflon tube and 1 each of Polyurethane tube) come from the
grommet to the fittings of the Filter Assembly No. 24.
3 Facing to the rear panel, connect the Teflon tube to the fitting located to the left of the filter and
the Polyurethane tube to the nipple located to the right side of the filter.
Figure A-17: Connecting tubes to the Filter Assembly No. 24
Filter Assembly No. 24
Screws binding M5x8
Teflon tube
Polyurethane tube
INSTALLATION
4 Follow the procedures below to connect the Teflon tube to the fitting.
4-1)Slide the tube support and locking nut to the free side (to the
left in the picture) of the flange tube.
4-2)Screw in the tube support into the M6 female screw in the
fitting so that flange part of the Teflon tube will be chewed
and sealed.
4-3)After screwing in the tube support, fix the locking nut to avoid
the tube support from loosening.
Figure A-18: Connecting the flange tube
Tube support Locking nut
INSTALLATION
2.3 Connecting the tubes
Connect the pneumatic unit, the sheath fluid and drain tubes to the back of the testing unit.
1. Connecting to the pneumatic unit
1 Connect the vacuum output nipple (marked VACUUM) on the pneumatic unit to the vacuum
supply nipple (marked VACUUM) on the testing unit using the accessory polyurethane tube.
2 Connect the compressed air output nipple (marked PRESSURE) on the pneumatic unit to the
compressed air supply nipple (marked PRESSURE) on the testing unit using the accessory
polyurethane tube.
Figure A-19: Connecting the pneumatic unit
Compressed air output nipple (PRESSURE)
Vacuum output nipple (VACCUM)
Pneumatic unit
Testing unit
Polyurethane tubes
Compressed air supply
nipple
Vacuum supply
nipple
INSTALLATION
2. Connecting the tubes to the reagents and waste (FPIA-3000)
1 Assemble the accessory dispenser set (connectors, tube, weight) as shown in the diagram below.
2 After assembling the dispenser set, clean it with reagent first, so that the reagent to be used
during the test is not contaminated.
3 Fill the dispenser set with PARTICLE SHEATH and fit the cap.
Figure A-20: Reagent container
Cap
Connector
Tube
Weight
PARTICLE SHEATH
INSTALLATION
4 Use the accessory polyurethane tube (6 4) to connect the PARTICLE SHEATH to the sheath
liquid aspiration nipple (marked SHEATH LIQUID) on the back of the testing unit.
Place the particle sheath container lower than the sheath aspiration nipple.
Figure A-21: Connection of the reagent container to the testing unit
5 Use the accessory polyurethane tube (6 4) to connect the overflow drain nipple (marked
OVERFLOW) on the back of the testing unit to the drain outlet (waste fluid container).
Install the waste fluid container so that it is positioned lower than the waste fluid nipple of the
testing unit.
PARTICLE SHEATH
Polyurethane tube
Sheath liquid aspiration nipple
(SHEATH LIQUID)
INSTALLATION
6 Use the accessory polyurethane tube (9 6) to connect the waste drain nipple (marked
WASTE) on the back of the testing unit to the drain outlet (waste fluid container).
Install the waste fluid container so that it is positioned lower than the waste fluid nipple of the
testing unit.
Figure A-22: Connecting the waste fluid tube
Drain outlet (waste fluid container)
Polyurethane tubes
Overflow drain nipple
(OVERFLOW)
Waste drain nipple (WASTE)
INSTALLATION
3. Connecting the tubes to the reagents and waste (FPIA-3000S)
Connect the sheath fluid, waste container, overflow waste fittings located on the rear panel using
the provided Teflon tube 4mmID x 6mmOD.
Follow the procedures below to connect to each fitting with the Teflon tube 4mmID x 6mmOD.
1 Cut vertically the point of the Teflon tube connecting in the fitting using a sharp knife.
2 Loosen the fixing nut of the fitting and insert the tubing prepared in the step (1) fully to hit to
the inner end.
3 Tighten the fixing nut of the fitting to secure the tube.
Figure A-23: Connecting the reagent and waste tubes
WARNING
When the organic solvent is used, open the sheath and the waste
containers, and connect them to the instrument right before testing. If
the sheath and the waste containers that contain solvent are left open, it
may cause fire or explosion after gas is filled in the room. There is also a
potential to expose to the toxic material.
CAUTION
Install the sheath and the waste containers in a lower position than the
waste outlet nipple of the testing unit.
When the organic solvent is used, open the sheath and the waste
containers and connect them to the instrument right before testing. If the
sheath and the waste containers are left open, evapolated gas will be
ignited and resulted in fire or explosion. There is also a potential to
expose to the toxic material.
Teflon tube 4mmID x 6mmOD
Fitting
Sheath inlet tube Waste outlet tube
Overflow outlet tube
INSTALLATION
2.4 Connecting the power cables and connection cables
Connect the testing unit with the data processing unit and pneumatic unit using the accessory
connection cables. Then connect the accessory power cords to the testing unit and the data
processing unit.
1. Connecting the testing unit with the data processing unit
Use the accessory USB 2.0 cable to connect the main unit and the data processing unit
Figure A-24: Connecting the testing unit with the data processing unit
Connection cable Testing unit Data processing unit
USB 2.0 cable USB USB
Table A-6: Connection cables
Data Processing unit
USB connector
Testing unit
USB2.0 cable
Data communication connector
INSTALLATION
2. Connecting the testing unit with the pneumatic unit.
Connect the pneumatic unit control input cable of the pneumatic unit to the pneumatic control
output connector of the testing unit.
Figure A-25: Connecting the testing unit with the pneumatic unit
Testing unit Pneumatic unit
Pneumatic unit control input connector
Pneumatic unit control
output connector
INSTALLATION
3. Connecting the power cable
Connect the accessory power cables to the testing unit, data processing unit and CRT monitor.
Figure A-26: Overall wiring diagram
CAUTION
Always connect the grounding wires when connecting the power cables. Refer to
Appendix A, 2.5 Grounding for details of the grounding method.
Data processing unit
Power cord
Testing unit
Power cord
Pneumatic unit
Power cord
INSTALLATION
2.5 Grounding
The instrument power supply cord uses a 3-prong plug. When the power supply socket is 3-prong
(with ground), simply plug it to the socket.
Figure A-27: Plugs
WARNING
Make sure to ground the instrument. Inadequate grounding could cause electric
shocks.
117 VAC Spec 220 VAC Spec 240 VAC Spec
INSTALLATION
2.6 Installing the analysis PC
1. Driver installation
Install the drivers on the analysis PC to enable it to recognize this instrument.
1 Connect this device and the analysis PC with the USB cable and switch ON the power for the
main unit. (You can not install the driver until you connect the USB and switch ON the main
unit power.)
2 Turn on the analysis PC.
3 Insert the accessory disk labeled FPIA-3000 CD-ROM in the CD drive of the PC.
4 After a short while, the new hardware is detected, so a dialog asking you to install the driver is
displayed.
5 Here, press the [Next] button to display the driver installation folder as necessary, select
driver on the CD drive as the copy source and install.
6 Hardware is detected three times. Each time, install the driver with the above procedure.
7 During this process, a dialog like that in the figure below is displayed once. Here, press the
[Continue Anyway] button.
Figure A-28: [Hardware Installation] dialog
8 When driver software has been installed three times, the driver installation is complete.
9 Next, check that the driver software is installed correctly.
When you select [Start] [Control panel] [System] [Hardware] [Device
manager], a device manager dialog like that in Figure A-29 is displayed.
Check that the three drivers below are displayed in the tree display displayed there.
SYSMEX-IPboard
USB High Speed Serial Converter
USB Serial Port(COM3)
NOTE: FPIA-3000S uses the same software as the FPIA-3000. The software
automatically recognizes the testing unit; either FPIA-3000S or FPIA-3000.
INSTALLATION
Figure A-29: [Device Manager] dialog
INSTALLATION
2. Installation of the FPIA-3000 application
Install the FPIA-3000 on the analysis PC.
1 Double click on [FPIA-3000(ENG).exe] on the CD.
Figure A-30: Welcome to the FPIA-3000 Setup Wizard dialog
2 Click on the [Next] button.
Figure A-31: Select installation folder
NOTE: Depending on the version of Windows, a dialog prompting you to update the system file
is displayed after double-clicking on [FPIA-3000(ENG).exe]. Click on the [OK] button.
The system file is automatically updated and the computer restarts. Run the installation
again from step 1.
INSTALLATION
Figure A-32: Installation Confirmation dialog
Figure A-33: Installation Complete dialog
5 Click on the [Close] button.
This completes FPIA-3000 installation.
INSTALLATION
3. Installation of Acrobat Reader
To view [HELP] - [Content] in the FPIA-3000, installed Adobe's Acrobat Reader is needed. Run
SetUp(JPN).exe (the location of which is mentioned after) in the FPIA-3000 software CD-ROM to
install Acrobat Reader.
(This version of the software must be 7 or later.)
D:\adobe\SetUp(ENG).exe
( "D:" can vary depending on your PC's configuration. Select the directory where you set the FPIA-
3000 software CD-ROM.)
APPENDIX B SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF
THE FPIA-3000/3000S
1. Specifications ..............................................................................................B-1
SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 B-1
1. Specifications
Name
Flow-type histogram analyzer FPIA-3000
Purpose
To test and analyze the sizes and shapes of various particles and cells in the fields of medical
chemistry, physicochemistry and general industry by image processing
Test Conditions
1) Subjects
(FPIA-3000)
E.g. Toner, silica, carbon, ceramics, grinding agents, powder paints, battery materials, metal
powders, pharmaceutical materials etc.
(FPIA-3000S)
Solvents which are listed in FPIA-3000S organic solvent list in APPENDIX E, GAS SENSOR
SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS.
2) Dispersant
Water based: PARTICLE SHEATH
Alcohol based: Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%)
*Accuracy of test data obtained using alcohol-based sheath liquid or
dispersant is not guaranteed.
3) Test range
Particle-diameter test range
When HPF is independently tested: 1.540 m
When LPF is independently tested: 8.0160 m
Circularity measurement range: 0.2001.000
4) Reference value for appropriate particle density
When HPF is independently tested: 36,000 particles/L when approximately 1-6 m of
particles are measured.
When LPF is independently tested: 36,000 particles/L when approximately 8 m of
particles are measured.
* The appropriate particle density varies with the particle diameters captured.
5) Required sample volume 5mL
6) Processing performance
Measurement mode Measurement time Throughput
HPF test mode Approx. 170 s approx. 21 samples/hr.
LPF test mode Approx. 170 s approx. 21 samples/hr.
Table B-1: Throughput
B-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
Test Items and display items
1) Test Items
(Particle diameter items)
CE Diameter
Max. Distance
Norm to max dist
Length
Width
Feret H Diameter (Horizontal)
Feret V Diameter (Vertical)
Martin H Diameter (Horizontal)
Martin V Diameter (Vertical)
Krumbein H Diameter (Horizontal)
Krumbein V Diameter (Vertical)
PE Diameter
Area(pixels)
Perimeter
Area
Convex Hull perimeter
Convex Hull area
(Particle Shape items)
Circularity
Intensity Mean
Intensity SD
Feret Aspect ratio
Area/Box
Aspect ratio (W/L)
Elongation
Aspect Ratio (max dist)
Convexity
Solidity
HS Circularity
Major axis
(Statistical analysis items)
Mean
Mode
SD
CV
50%
Lower%
Upper%
NOTE: Only the surface area circular diameter and circularity analysis results when particle
sheath liquid is used as the sheath liquid and dispersal agent are assured.
(Analysis data)
Selected (#)
Selected (%)
Large (%)
Middle (%)
Small (%)
(Other items)
Detected (#)
Analyzed (#)
Density
Analyed volume
2) Display Items
Particle image
Histograms of measured items
Scattergrams of measured items
Cumulative distribution of measured items
List of stored data
Frequency tables for measurement items
Graph(Overlay-View)
Graph(Trend-View) (analysis parameters, scattergrams)
Meta data
Sample Data Date
Sample Number
Sample Name
Sample Group Name
Measurer name
B-4 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005
Reagents and their consumption
At startup
Testing
At shutdown
At sheath liquid replacement
Exterior dimensions and weights
Reagent Consumption
PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic rinse) approx. 90 mL
PARTICLE SHEATH (for background checking) approx. 70 mL
PARTICLE SHEATH (for auto focus) approx. 170 mL
Reagent Consumption
PARTICLE SHEATH (For sheath + rinse) Approx. 130 mL/sample
Reagent Consumption
PARTICLE SHEATH Approx. 90 mL
Reagent Consumption
Replaced reagent (PARTICLE SHEATH or organic solvent) Approx. 710 mL
Table B-2: Reagents and their consumption
Component Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg)
Testing unit Approx. 900 Approx. 455 Approx. 475 Approx. 59.5
Pneumatic unit Approx. 280 Approx. 400 Approx. 355 Approx. 17
Table B-3: Dimensions of the components
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 B-5
Operating Environment
Ambient temperature: 1530C
Relative humidity: 3085%
Installation conditions: Avoid direct sunlight, dust, vibration, acidity and condensation.
Power supply
Rated voltage: AC100 V10%
Frequency: 50/601 Hz
Power supply/power consumption
Testing unit
Pneumatic unit
Heat Compensation Required: Approximately 1,979 BTU/h (approximately 499 kcal/h)
Protection type
Classification by method of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment
Voltage specification Rated voltage Power consumption
50 Hz 60 Hz
100 V-type
200 V-type
100117 V10%
220240 V10%
300 VA max.
Voltage specification Rated voltage Power consumption
50 Hz 60 Hz
100 V-type 100117 V10% 230 VA max. 280 VA max.
200 V-type 220240 V10% 220 VA max. 250 VA max.
Table B-4: Power consumption of the components
Precision
1) Accuracy
Average values when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersant and the samples below
are measured ten times in succession will be within the range of rated values below.
Item Analysis
mode
Sample Particle
diameter(m)
Sample
density (10
3

particles/mL)
Standard
values:
Average
diameter
HPE Duke 4016A 1.6 Approx. 1,000 3%
HPE Duke 4210A 10 Approx. 100 3%
LPE Duke 4240A 40 Approx. 50 3%
Average
circularity
HPE By Sysmex
Standard particles
for FPIA
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 0.5%
LPE By Sysmex
Standard particles
for FPIA
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 0.5%
Particle
density
HPE By Sysmex
Standard particles
for FPIA
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 5%
LPE By Sysmex
Standard particles
for FPIA
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 5%
Table B-5: Accuracy
2) Reproducibility (diameter)
Coefficients of variation when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersant and the samples
below are measured ten times in succession will be within the range of rated values below.
Item Analysis
mode
Sample Particle
diameter(m)
Sample
density (10
3

particles/mL)
Standard
values:
Average
diameter
10%
diameter
90%
diameter
Average
circularity
HPE By Sysmex
Standard particles
for FPIA
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 0.3%
LPE By Sysmex
Standard particles
for FPIA
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 0.3%
Particle
density
HPE By Sysmex
Standard particles
for FPIA
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 5%
LPE By Sysmex
Standard particles
for FPIA
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 5%
Table B-6: Reproducibility
3) Carryover
Carryover rates when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersant and the samples below
are measured will be within the range of rated values below.
2 mPSL, approx. 170,000 10
3
pcs/mL (5200A/ Duke)
Standard values: Carryover rate: 0.3% max.
Recommended specifications for data processing PC
1) OS Windows XP professional SP1 or later
2) CPU Intel Pentium4 3.0 GHz or faster / Hyper Threading Technology: ON
3) Memory 1.0 GB or greater
4) Hard disk drive 100 GB or greater
5) Storage One 3.5-inch floppy disk drive
DVD R/RW (or DVD-RAM) drive 1
6) Input/output ports At least four USB 2.0 ports
RS232C
Ethernet 10/100BASE-T 1 port
7) Monitor 12801024 resolution or greater (at least 17-inch LCD monitor
recommended)
NOTE: The diameters of latex particles 4016A, 4210A and 4240A used in this test are
guaranteed by Duke Scientific Corporation on the basis of NIST (National
Institute of Standards and Technology) standards.
Standard particles for FPIA by Sysmex are independently developed,
produced and managed by Sysmex as standard substances for measurement
of average circularity and particle density by the FPIA-3000.
APPENDIX C TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS
1. Table of system settings............................................................................. C-1
2. Table of SOP settings ................................................................................ C-3
TABLE OF SYSTEM SETTINGS
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 C-1
1. Table of system settings
Groups Type Item Default values Unit
System ID Number Instrument Type FPIA-3000
Print Auto Print Not Apply
Record operation Auto Delete Not Apply
Sample Number Sample number increment Apply
Display Toolbar Valid
Unit Unit of density /l
Testing unit Pneumatic Unit
Timer
ON/OFF OFF
Timeout Duration 5 minutes
Detector Target
temperature
Defector Target temperature 25.0 C
Detector Temp
Correction
Detector Temp Correction Apply
Transmission Serial port Port No Port 1
Baud rate 9600 bps
Character Size 8
Parity NONE
Stop Bit 1
Class ClassB
Delay time 0 Sec.
LAN port IP Address 192
IP Address 168
IP Address 0
IP Address 0
Port No. 4000
Delay time Sec.
Transmission
block
Transmit particle diameter table No
Transmit form table No
Transmit scattergram No
Transmit extended analysis No
Automatic
transmission
Auto transmission (serial) No
Auto transmission (LAN) No
Select Transmission Data SelectAll
C-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
Supplementary explanation
1) System ID number - Instrument Type:
The FPIA-3000 allows its user to set instrument type.
Input an ID up to 10 alphanumerics long.
Do not use "/" or "\" character.
2) System - Record operation - Automatic deletion
Use/Do not use
The maximum number of samples stored into memory is 1000. You can set whether or not the
oldest sample data is automatically erased when there are more than 1000 samples for memory.
The default is set to Do not use.
3) System - Sample number - Sample number increment
Use/Do not use
You can set whether or not the sample number on the measurement and analysis conditions
screen is incremented automatically. The default is set to Use.
4) Sensor target temperature
This sets the target temperature for the sensor.
The default is a target temperature range of 25.0C. The target temperature can be set in the
range from 15.0C to 30.0C.
Since the target temperature is adjusted automatically when detection unit room temperature
correct is set to Use, the target temperature setting is only in effect when Do not use is set.
5) Detection unit room temperature correction
Use/Do not use
You can set whether or not to automatically adjust the temperature of the detection unit.
The default is set to Use.
6) System-Display-Toolbar
[Valid / Invalid]
Menu icons of the FPIA-3000 will be displayed if you select [Valid] or will not be displayed if
you select [Invalid].
7) System - Unit - Unit of density
Unit of concentration will be set /UL if you select "/UL" or /ML if "ML".
CAUTION
Attention must be paid to the following when detection unit room temperature
correction is set to No.
(1) If the difference between the ambient temperature (room temperature) and the
target temperature is large, the detection unit temperature may not reach the
set target temperature. Change the ambient temperature or the target
temperature.
(Example: Ambient temperature 30.0C, target temperature 15.0C)
(2) Depending on the target temperature, it may take over an hour for the
temperature within the detection unit to stabilize.
Open the [Testing/Analysis Parameters] dialog screen and check the device
status.
(3) The measurement results are outside the assured range.
2. Table of SOP settings
Group Item Units
Testing Parameters Magnification
Auto Merge
Merge(LPF+HPF)
By time/By count
Count Limit Particles
Repeat Times Times
SOP Update Date
Sheath liquid Parameters Sheath liquid ID
Testing Unit Status RPM Target rpm
RPM Range rpm
Particle Parameters BG compensation
Binarization method
Smoothing filter
Edge emphasis filter
Coef. A for Binarizing %
Coef. B for Binarizing
Diameter correction
Statistical Parameters Dilution ratio
Smoothing
Miles - Lantuejoul Method
Density correction
Size Parameter
Size-Dsp Axis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size lower % %
Size-Dsp Axis Max um
Size- Dsp Axis Min um
Shape Parameter
Shape Dsp Axis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-Dsp Axis Max
Shape-Dsp Axis Min
IP board settings Minimum pixel
Median filter
Laplacian filter
Binarization threshold setting coefficient a% %
Binarization threshold setting coefficient b
Extended Analysis1 Analysis type
Size Parameter
Size-Dsp Axis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size lower % %
Shape Parameter
Shape Dsp Axis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-Dsp Axis Max
Shape-Dsp Axis Min
Polygon limit point
Size Parameter
Size-Dsp Axis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size lower % %
Shape Parameter
Shape Dsp Axis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-Dsp Axis Max
Group Item Units
Shape-Dsp Axis Min
Polygon limit point
Size Parameter
Size-Dsp Axis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size lower % %
Shape Parameter
Shape Dsp Axis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-Dsp Axis Max
Shape-Dsp Axis Min
Polygon limit point
Size Parameter
Size-Dsp Axis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size lower % %
Shape Parameter
Shape Dsp Axis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-Dsp Axis Max
Shape-Dsp Axis Min
Polygon limit point
Group Item Units
Supplementary explanation:
1. Testing Parameters
1) Magnification
You can select from three modes: HPF, LPF, and LPF -> HPF.
2) AutoMerge
If you select [Apply] and set repeat count up as more than 2 in Stop by Time, all measured
data will be merged automatically and new merged records will be generated after all repeat
measurement has been finished.
Size Parameter
Size-Dsp Axis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size lower % %
Shape Parameter
Shape Dsp Axis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-Dsp Axis Max
Shape-Dsp Axis Min
Polygon limit point
User difinition Definition 1
Definition 2
Definition 3
Definition 4
Definition 5
Definition 6
Definition 7
Definition 8
Definition 9
Definition 10
Group Item Units
3) Merge(LPF+HPF)
If you select [Analyze], records of full range will be generated after LPF/HPF measure if
you measured in full range mode. For details refer to Chapter 16, FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION.
4) By time/By count
You can select quantity count or total count.
5) Count Limit
When you select total count mode, you can set the number for reaching the target.
6) Repeat Times
When you select quantity count mode, you can set the number of measurement repetitions.
Up to 20 can be set.
7) SOP Update date
You can view day when SOP configuration information is updated (cannot be edited here.)
2. Sheath liquid Parameters
1) Sheath liquid ID
You can select the sheath liquid used for measurement.
You can select from particle sheath, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and ethylene glycol.
3. Testing Unit Status
1) RPM Target
You can set the target value for the mixing rpm of the sample mixer unit.
You can set from 50 to 750 rpm.
2) RPM Range
You can set the rpm monitoring range for the mixing rpm of the sample mixer unit.
If you input 100 rpm, the rotation rate is monitored 100 rpm of the mixer rpm target value.
4. Particle Parameters
1) BG compensation
Apply/Not Apply
You can set whether or not to use background compensation in the particle analysis
processing. The default is set to Apply.
2) Smoothing filter
Median, Other 1, Other 2, Don't
You can select a smoothing filter for eliminating noise.
The default is set to Median.
3) Edge emphasis filter
2D filter, Other 1, Other 2, Don't
You can select the edge emphasis processing filter.
The default is set to 2D filter.
4) Binarization threshold setting
You can set the threshold for binarization processing.
Binarization threshold setting coefficient A% (Default = 85)
Binarization threshold setting coefficient B (Default = 0)
5) Diameter correction
Apply/Not Apply
You can select whether or not to correct the calculated particle diameter parameters and
circularity with the calibration results. The default is set to Apply.
5. Statistical Parameters
1) Dilution ratio
When the dilution ratio is set, the particle density is displayed converted to the pre-dilution
value.
You can input a real number up to a maximum of 99,999.
2) Smoothing
Apply/Not Apply
You can select whether or not to smooth the frequency distribution display.
The default is set to Not Apply.
3) Miles - Lantuejoul Method
Apply/Not Apply
You can select whether or not to use frame correction.
The default is set to Apply.
4) Density correction
Apply/Not Apply
You can select whether or not to correct the particle concentrations with the calibration
results.
5) Size Parameter
You can select the particle form.
6) Size-Dsp Axis Div (Number of particle display axis divisions)
You can set and change the number of divisions for the X-axis direction particle distribution
display axis.
You can set from 1 to 512.
7) Size Upper Limit (Particle diameter upper value)
You can set the upper value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.
8) Size Lower Limit (Particle diameter lower value)
You can set the lower value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.
9) Size Upper% (Particle diameter upper % value)
You can set the upper % value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.
10)Size Lower% (Particle diameter lower % value)
You can set the lower % value for the X-axis direction particle diameter.
11)Size-Dsp Axis Max (Max. value on particle display axis)
You can set the maximum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle distribution.
12)Size-Dsp Axis Min (Min. value on particle display axis)
You can set the minimum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle distribution.
13)Shape Parameter
You can select the particle shape.
14)Shape-Dsp Axis Div (Number of shape display axis divisions)
You can set the number of divisions for the Y-axis direction particle shape display axis.
15)Shape Upper Limit (Shape upper value)
You can set the upper value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.
16)Shape Lower Limit (Shape lower value)
You can set the lower value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.
17)Shape Upper% (Shape upper % value)
You can set the upper % value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.
18)Shape Lower% (Shape lower % value)
You can set the lower % value for the Y-axis direction particle shape.
19)Shape-Dsp Axis Max (Max. value on form display axis)
You can set the maximum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle shape
distribution.
20)Shape-Dsp Axis Min (Min. value on form display axis)
You can set the maximum value for displaying the Y-axis direction particle shape
distribution.
6. Image processing board settings
You can set the parameters for the image processing board mounted in the main unit.
1) Minimum pixel
You can set the effective minimum number of pixels captured.
5/12/20/40/60/90/145/215/300/395/510/645/830/950/1050/1250 can be selected.
2) Median filter
You can set whether or not to use the median filter for smoothing processing.
Apply or Not Apply can be selected.
3) Laplacian filter
You can set whether or not to use a Laplacian filter for edge emphasis processing.
4) Binarization threshold setting coefficient
You can set the threshold for binarize the captured image.
Binarization threshold setting coefficient a% (Default = 90)
Binarization threshold setting coefficient b (Default = 0)
7. Enhancing analysis 1-5
These items are valid for enhancing analyses that can be used on the [Analysis results] screen.
This section explains enhancing analysis 1 as typical.
1) Analysis type
Rectangular analysis/Polygonal analysis
You can select either rectangular analysis, which limits through normal discrimination
operations, or polygonal analysis, which limits by specifying points on the scattergram.
2) Size Parameter
3) Size-Dsp Axis Div (Number of particle display axis divisions)
display axis.
4) Size Upper Limit (Particle diameter upper value)
5) Size Lower Limit (Particle diameter lower value)
6) Size Upper% (Particle diameter upper % value)
7) Size Lower% (Particle diameter lower % value)
8) Size-Dsp Axis Max (Max. value on particle display axis)
9) Size-Dsp Axis Min (Min. value on particle display axis)
10)Shape Parameter
11)Shape-Dsp Axis Div (Number of shape display axis divisions)
12)Shape Upper Limit (Shape upper value)
13)Shape Lower Limit (Shape lower value)
14)Shape Upper% (Shape upper % value)
15)Shape Lower% (Shape lower % value)
16)Shape-Dsp Axis Max (Max. value on form display axis)
You can set the maximum value for displaying the X-axis direction particle shape
distribution.
17)Shape-Dsp Axis Min (Min. value on form display axis)
distribution.
18)Polygon limit points
These show the polygonal limit points on the scattergram.
This is only valid when the analysis type is polygonal.
The limit points can only be changed on the [Analysis Results] screen.
8. User definition items
The user can mount user definitions by creating their own calculation equations using the
statistical results.
User defined equations 1-10 can be set.
The results of these calculations are stored into the results records.
Below is the method for creating a user-defined equation.
First, move the mouse to the value column for user-defined equation 1-10, then left click to
display the figure below.
Input the item name, calculation equation, and unit, then press the [Setting] button.
Figure C-1: [Setting Extended Analysis items] dialog
The creation method is shown below.
1) Item Name input
You can input the defined equation name. You can input alphanumerics.
2) Equation input
For variables, you can use the following two methods. (For the input characters, lowercase
and uppercase are not distinguished.)
Variables 1:
Variables that take the form (scatter).axis.(parameter)
Scatter: standard item and five expansion analysis items
SS1, ES1, ES2, ES3, ES4, ES5
Meanings: SSI (standard) ES-ES5 (expansion analysis)
Axes: X, Y
Parameters: 7 analysis items
MEAN, MODE, P50, LOWER, UPPER, SD, CV
Meanings: MEAN (average), MODE (mode value), P50 (50% value)
LOWER (lower value), UPPER (upper value), SD (standard
deviation), CV (coefficient of variation)
(Concrete examples)
SS1.X.LOWER: On the standard analysis screen scattergram, of the items selected on the
X axis, this takes the Lower value data as the variable.
Variables 2:
Variables that take the form (scatter).A.(analysis results)
The scattergram is the same as above.
Analysis results: The results analyzed
D, SP, MP, LP, AP, TC, VC, SC
Meaning: D (Density: Particle density),
SP (SmallParticle: Small particle ratio),
MP (MiddleParticle: Middle particle ratio),
LP (LargeParticle: Large particle ratio),
AP (AreaParticle: Particle limit ratio),
TC (TotalCounts: Particle detection count),
VC (ValidCounts: Valid analysis count),
SC (SelectedParticle: Selected particle count),
(Concrete examples)
ES1.A.D: Takes the density of the expansion analysis rectangular analysis 1 screen as the
variable.
The functions that can be used are as follows.
Functions: LOG(), LOG10(), EXP(), EXP10(), SQRT()
3) Input the unit.
Input the unit in alphanumerics.
4) User-defined item examples
These are examples of user-defined items.
Example 1: DATA1=LOG(ES2.A.D)
Example 2: DATA2=ES1.A.AP/ES2.AP
APPENDIX D OUTPUT FORMAT
1. Summary .................................................................................................... D-1
2. Serial communications ............................................................................... D-1
2.1 Hardware.............................................................................................. D-1
2.2 Communication Format ........................................................................ D-1
2.3 Signal Level.......................................................................................... D-2
2.4 Protocols used in communication with the host ................................... D-2
2.5 Class A communications...................................................................... D-2
2.6 Class B communications...................................................................... D-3
2.7 Processing of communication errors with the host............................... D-4
2.8 Monitoring the receiver (host) side....................................................... D-4
3. Ethernet communications........................................................................... D-5
3.1 Hardware.............................................................................................. D-5
3.2 Software............................................................................................... D-5
3.3 Text format ........................................................................................... D-6
3.4 Transmission format selection ............................................................. D-6
4. Data format................................................................................................. D-7
4.1 Test results (limited data)..................................................................... D-7
4.2 Histogram data..................................................................................... D-9
4.3 Scattergram data................................................................................ D-11
4.4 Extend data........................................................................................ D-13
5. Particle form............................................................................................. D-19
OUTPUT FORMAT
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 D-1
1. Summary
This section describes the interface for communications between the data processing unit and the
host computer, enabling serial communications and Ethernet communications.
2. Serial communications
2.1 Hardware
1) Connectors
The connector is a male 9-pin D-SUB connector on the instrument.
The cable connector is a female 9-pin D-SUB connector.
Fixing screws for this connector have an inch thread pitch.
2) Device input/output signals
2.2 Communication Format
Data communication is full duplex, synchronous.
Pin number Signal name Signal direction
1
2 Data received (RD) IN
3 Data sent (TD) OUT
4 Data terminal ready (DTR) OUT
5 Signal ground (SG)
6 Data set ready (DSR) IN
7 Send request (RTS) OUT
8 Send OK (CTS) IN
9
Settings Setting types
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,200/19,200/28,800/38,400
Data length 7 bits/8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit/2 bit
Parity Odd/even/none
Protocol Class A/Class B
Interval 0 s to 15 s
OUTPUT FORMAT
D-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005
2.3 Signal Level
As follows, compliant with JIS C67361.
2.4 Protocols used in communication with the host
The FPIA-3000 supports the following 2 protocols for data communications with the host:
1) Class A
2) Class B
2.5 Class A communications
1) Text format
Text is sent in a single block or multiple blocks, depending on the length.
Each text block begins with STX and ends with ETX.
2) Communications sequences
The class A communications sequence is shown below.
You can select the minimum interval (T) transmission for transmissions between blocks
communicating from the FPIA-3000 from 015 seconds.
Level Data signal Control signal
At least +3 V Logical 0 start bit ON
-3 V max. Logical 1 stop bit OFF
Transmission of only a single block
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
Block 1
Transmission of multiple blocks
Block N Block 2
Block 1 Block 2
T
OUTPUT FORMAT
2.6 Class B communications
This is the communications format in which responses from the host computer to data sent by the
FPIA-3000 are received.
1) Text format
The class B communications sequence is shown below.
Any length of time from 0 to 15 seconds can be chosen for the minimum transmission interval (T)
between when the FPIA-3000 sends data and receives ACK from the host and when it sends the
next data block.
3) Block resend
If the response code is NAK, the preceding block is resent.
However, it resends up to four times, and after that cancels transmission if it receives another NAK.
ACK and NAK are not bracketed by STX and ETX.
4) Communication interruption
To interrupt transmission from the host side, EOT is sent after a block is finished.
When the FPIA-3000 receives EOT as a response code, it cancels subsequent transmission of text.
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
Block 1
Block N Block 2
Block 1 Block 2
T
Block N
A
C
K
T A
C
K
OUTPUT FORMAT
2.7 Processing of communication errors with the host
The FPIA-3000 monitors and processes the following errors:
1. Transmission error when receiving a response code
2. Reception of a break code
3. CTS not active when sending
4. DSR not active when sending
5. Monitoring of response codes (Class B)
6. Monitoring of resend repetitions when a resend request is received.
7. Timeout when receiving a response (Class B)
1) Transmission error when receiving a response code
If a parity error, overrun error or a frame error has occurred when receiving a response code, the
subsequent transmission of data is canceled.
2) Reception of a break code
Ignored
3) CTS not active when sending
When sending data, if CTS is not active for five seconds or more, transmission is canceled.
4) DSR not active when sending
When sending data, if DSR is not active for one second or more, transmission is canceled.
5) Monitoring of response codes (Class B)
When the response code is other than ACK or NAK, the subsequent transmission of blocks is
canceled.
6) Monitoring of resend repetitions when a resend request is received.
If, after the third retransmission (i.e., four transmissions in all), NAK was returned, the subsequent
transmission of blocks is canceled.
7) Timeout when receiving a response (Class B)
If, after sending data, neither ACK or NAK is sent within 15 seconds, data transmission is canceled.
2.8 Monitoring the receiver (host) side
The following errors must be monitored to maintain the reliability of data transmission.
1) Receive data timeout
If the text end code, such as ETX, is not received within a certain period.
2) Transmission error
If a parity error or similar problem occurs.
OUTPUT FORMAT
3. Ethernet communications
3.1 Hardware
The physical layer and datalink layer are compliant with IEEE802.3.
Connectors
Use Ethernet twisted pair cables (UTP cable category 5) for connections.
Input/Output Signals
3.2 Software
1) Network layer/transport layer
The TCP/IP protocol is used.
2) Session layer
The connection uses the host as the server and the instrument as the client, and is made on startup.
If the connection fails, it is deemed a connection error and no attempts to reconnect are made.
3) Presentation layer
Transmitted data is ASCII (8 bit).
The FPIA-3000 supports Class A for data communications with the host.
Pin number Signal name Signal direction
1 TD+ OUT
2 TD- OUT
3 RD+ IN
4 NC
5 NC
6 RD- IN
7 NC
8 NC
OUTPUT FORMAT
3.3 Text format
1) Text format
The class A communications sequence is shown below.
You can select the minimum interval (T) transmission for transmissions between blocks
communicating from the FPIA-3000 from 015 seconds.
3.4 Transmission format selection
You can select whether or not to use the following transmission formats.
The test results are always sent.
No.
Transmission item Number of blocks
Transmission setting
1 Test data Test results (limited data) 1-block transfer Apply
2 Frequency data X-axis frequency data 1-block transfer Apply/Not Apply
Y-axis frequency data 1-block transfer Apply/Not Apply
3 Scattergram data 2-D frequency data8 1-block transfer Apply/Not Apply
4 Extended Analysis
data
Test results(Extend data) 1-block transfer Apply/Not Apply
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
S
T
X
E
T
X
Text
(Text length not
defined)
Block 1
Block N Block 2
Block 1 Block 2
T
OUTPUT FORMAT
4. Data format
4.1 Test results (limited data)
No. Item Char. Sample Notes
1 STX 1
2 Text segment 1 "D"
3 Block division 1 "A"
4 Block No. 2 "01"
6 Number of blocks 2 "01"
8 Record No. 10 Right-justified; padded with spaces
18 Testing equipment name 10 "FPIA-3000" Left-justified; padded with spaces
28 Device ID 10 "FPIA-3000" Left-justified; padded with spaces
38 Measurement mode 1 1: HPF 2: LPF 3: LPF-HPF
39 Analysis date (YMD) 8 "20040811"
47 Test time 4 "1725"
51 Reanalysis date 8 "20040811"
59 Reanalyzed Time 4 "1725"
63 Error 1 (a)
64 Operator name 20 Left-justified; padded with spaces
84 Reanalyst name 20 Left-justified; padded with spaces
104 SOP 20 "Latex"
124 Sample name 20 Left-justified; padded with spaces
144 Sample information No. 15 "456789012345" Right-justified; padded with spaces
159 Sample No. Type 15 Left-justified; padded with spaces
174 Sample comment 20 Left-justified; padded with spaces
194 Count technique 1 1: Quantity count 2: Total count
195 Detected (#) 6 Right-justified; padded with spaces
201 Analyzed (#) 6 "******" Right-justified; padded with spaces
207 Selected (#) 6 "******" Right-justified; padded with spaces
213 Density 6 "******" Right-justified; padded with spaces
219 Small (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
OUTPUT FORMAT
225 Middle (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
231 Large (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
237 Detected (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
243 Size Parameter 2 Right-justified; padded with spaces
245 Particle value (average) 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
252 Mode value 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
259 Particle value (SD) 7 "**.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
266 Particle value (CV) 7 "**.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
273 Lower value 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
280 50% value 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
287 Upper value 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
294 Shape Parameter 2 Right-justified; padded with spaces
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
345 User analysis item 1 7 "***.***" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
OUTPUT FORMAT
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 D-9
When data overflow occurs, the corresponding number of asterisks (*****) is transmitted.
4.2 Histogram data
X-axis frequency data (E.g.: Equivalent circle diameter)
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
415 ETX 1
(a) 0: No error 1: Error (not relevant to the reliability of data)
2: Error (relevant to the reliability of data)
1 STX 1
3 Block division 1 "H"
4 Block No. 2 "01"
18 Particle type 2 "01"
20 Particle axis attribute (log/
linear)
1
21 Interval width 3 "226"
OUTPUT FORMAT
D-10 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
Y-axis frequency data (E.g.: Circularity)
24 Axis maximum value 5 "400" Right-justified; padded with spaces
29 Axis minimum value 5 "0.6" Right-justified; padded with spaces
Frequency data 1 5 "*****" Right-justified; padded with spaces
Frequency data 2 5 "*****"
|
1168 ETX 1
1 STX 1
3 Block division 1 "H"
4 Block No. 2 "01"
18 Particle type 2 "01"
linear)
1
21 Interval width 3 "80" Right-justified; padded with spaces
24 Axis maximum value 5 "1" Right-justified; padded with spaces
29 Axis minimum value 5 "0.2" Right-justified; padded with spaces
Frequency data 1 5 "*****" Right-justified; padded with spaces
|
438 ETX 1
OUTPUT FORMAT
4.3 Scattergram data
Block 1
1 STX 1
3 Block division 1 "S"
4 Block No. 2 "01"
18 Particle diameter from (Y
axis)
2 "01"
linear)
1 "02" "1": Linear "2": Log
21 Particle interval width 3 "226" Right-justified; padded with spaces
24 Max. value on particle
diameter axis
5 "200" Right-justified; padded with spaces
29 Min. value on particle axis 5 "0.5" Right-justified; padded with spaces
34 Particle type (Y axis) 2 "04"
36 Particle axis attribute (Y
axis)
1 "1" "1": Linear "2": Log
37 Particle interval width (Y
axis)
40 Particle axis maximum
value (Y axis)
45 Particle axis minimum
value (Y axis)
3 "0.2" Right-justified; padded with spaces
Frequency data 1 (X axis) 5 "*****" Right-justified; padded with spaces
Frequency data 2 (X axis) 5 "*****"
|
Frequency data 227 (X
axis)
5 "*****"
1179 ETX 1
OUTPUT FORMAT
Block 81
1 STX 1
3 Block division 1 "S"
4 Block No. 2 "81"
18 Particle diameter from (Y
axis)
2 "01"
linear)
1 "1": Linear "2": Log
21 Particle interval width 3 "226" Right-justified; padded with spaces
24 Max. value on particle
diameter axis
29 Min. value on particle axis 5 "0.5" Right-justified; padded with spaces
34 Particle type (Y axis) 2 "04"
36 Particle axis attribute (Y
axis)
1 "1" "1": Linear "2": Log
37 Particle interval width (Y
axis)
40 Particle axis maximum
value (Y axis)
45 Particle axis minimum
value (Y axis)
3 "0.2" Right-justified; padded with spaces
Frequency data 1 (X axis) 5 "*****" Right-justified; padded with spaces
Frequency data 2 (X axis) 5 "*****"
|
Frequency data 227 (X
axis)
5 "*****"
1179 ETX 1
OUTPUT FORMAT
4.4 Extend data
1 STX 1
3 Block division 1 "K"
4 Block No. 2 "01"
18 Extend code 1 "1"
19 Detected (#) 6 "******" Right-justified; padded with spaces
43 Small (%) (a) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
49 Middle (%) (a) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
55 Large (%) (a) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
61 Selected (%) 6 "***.**" Fixed decimal point position/ space
padding
67 Size Parameter (X axis) 2 Right-justified; padded with spaces
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
118 Shape Parameter (Y axis) 2 Right-justified; padded with spaces
OUTPUT FORMAT
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
OUTPUT FORMAT
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
OUTPUT FORMAT
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
OUTPUT FORMAT
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
OUTPUT FORMAT
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
padding
773 ETX
(a) If Polygon range limit analysis is selected at Extended Analysis, these datas become
OUTPUT FORMAT
5. Particle form
Particle type No. Name
1 CE Diameter (number base)
2 CE Diameter (area base)
3 CE Diameter (volume base)
4 Circularity
5 Max. Distance
6 Norm to max dist
7 Length
8 Width
9 Feret H Diameter (Horizontal)
10 Feret V Diameter (Vertical)
11 Martin H Diameter (Horizontal)
12 Martin V Diameter (Vertical)
13 Krumbein H Diameter (Horizontal)
14 Krumbein V Diameter (Vertical)
15 PE Diameter
16 Area (pixels)
17 Perimeter
18 Area
19 Convex Hull perimeter
20 Convex Hull area
21 Intensity Mean
22 Intensity SD
23 Feret Aspect ratio
24 Area/Box
25 Aspect Ratio (W/L)
26 Elongation
27 Aspect Ratio (max dist)
28 Convexity
29 Solidity
30 HS Circularity
31 Major axis
OUTPUT FORMAT
Blank page.
APPENDIX E GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST
OF FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC
SOLVENTS
1. Gas sensor level setting values...................................................................E-1
2. List of FPIA-3000S recognized organic solvents.........................................E-2
GAS SENSOR SETTING VALUES AND LIST OF FPIA-3000S RECOGNIZED ORGANIC SOLVENTS
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 E-1
1. Gas sensor level setting values
Since the gas sensor sensitivity is different on each organic solvent, set the gas sensor sensitivity
according to the organic solvent to be used. Consult with your Sysmex service representative for
the sensor level setting value that is not listed in the Table E-1.
No. Name of the Organic Solvent Gas Sensor Level Setting Values
1 n-hexane LEVEL 3
2 cyclohexane LEVEL 3
3 n-heptane LEVEL 4
4 acetone LEVEL 4
5 isopropyl alcohol LEVEL 4
6 ethanol LEVEL 4
7 Ethylene glycol LEVEL 4
8 xylene LEVEL 4
9 o- xylene LEVEL 4
10 m- xylene LEVEL 4
11 p- xylene LEVEL 4
12 chloroform LEVEL 4
13 diethylene glycol LEVEL 4
14 cyclohexanone LEVEL 4
15 dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) LEVEL 4
16 N,N-dimethyl formamide (DMF) LEVEL 4
17 decane LEVEL 4
18 tetrahydrofuran LEVEL 4
19 1,1,1-trichloro ethane LEVEL 4
20 1,1,2-trichloro ethane LEVEL 4
21 toluene LEVEL 4
22 propylene glycol LEVEL 4
23 benzene (benzol) LEVEL 4
24 Polyethylene glycol LEVEL 4
25 methanol LEVEL 4
26 Methyl ethyl ketone LEVEL 4
27 Ethyl acetate LEVEL 4
28 n-butyl acetate LEVEL 4
29 s-butyl acetate LEVEL 4
30 methyl acetate LEVEL 4
31 kerosene LEVEL 4
32 octane LEVEL 4
33 nonane LEVEL 4
Table E-1: Gas Sensor Level Setting Value for the Typical Organic Solvent
E-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
2. List of FPIA-3000S recognized organic solvents
Hydraulic parts used in the FPIA-3000S are made of materials that are resistant to the organic
solvents listed in the Table E-2 List of Recognized Organic Solvents.

CAUTION
Table E-2 List of Recognized Organic Solvents shows the applicability and
compatibility of the hydraulic parts against the organic solvent, well focused
particle images may not be obtained depending on the viscosity and specific
gravity of the organic solvent since a stable sheath is not formed. If the ignition
point, the boiling point, or the melting point is very low, there is a potential of a
fire or an explosion.
FPIA-3000S specifications are assured only when the PARTICLE SHEATH is
used as the sheath fluid. When an organic solvent is used, the particle image
may be different due to the refractive index of the solvent used. Accordingly, the
analysis results of the particle diameter and the circularity may be different from
those analyzed using the PARTICLE SHEATH.
No. Name of the Organic Solvent
1 2,2-dimethyl butane
2 2,3-dimethyl butane
3 2-n-butoxyl ethanol
4 4-hydroxy 4-methyl 2-pentanone
5 n-butyl acetate
6 n-hexane
7 n-heptane
8 -terpineol
9 acrylic acid
10 ethyl acrylate
11 butyl acrylate
12 methyl acrylate
13 acrylonitrile
14 butoxy ethanol adipate
15 acetyl acetone
16 acetonitrile
17 acetophenone
18 acetone
19 methyl acetoacetate
20 aniline
21 amino alcohol
22 amyl chloronaphthalene
23 amyl naphthalene
Table E-2: List of Recognized Organic Solvents
24 iso dodecane
25 isophorone
26 isobutyl alcohol
27 isobutyl aldehyde
28 isobutyl ether
29 isopropyl alcohol
30 isopropyl ether
31 isobutyric acid
32 ethanol
33 ethyl cyclopentane
34 ethyl benzene
35 ethylene glycol
36 ethylene glycol monoethyl ether
37 ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate
38 ethylene chlorohydrin
39 ethylene diamine
40 epichlorohydrin
41 octyl alcohol
42 ortho chloro ethyl benzene
43 ortho di chloro benzene
44 butyl oleate
45 methyl oleate
46 xylene
47 glyceric acetate
48 m-cresol
49 chloro acetone
50 chloro aniline
51 chloro dodecane
52 1-chloro naphthalene
53 chloroprene monomer
54 chloro bromo methane
55 chloroform
56 chloro ethyl carbonate
57 diethylamin
58 diethyl sulfate
59 diethyl sebacate
60 diethyl benzene
61 diethylene glycol
62 dioxane
63 dioxolanes
64 cyclohexanone
65 cyclohexane
66 dichloro isopropyl ether
67 dichloro butane
68 dicyclohexylamine
69 dibutyl amin
70 dibutyl ether
71 dibenzyl ether
72 dipentene
73 dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO)
74 dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO)
75 silicone oil
76 styrene monomer
77 cetane
78 dioctyl sebacate
79 dibutyl sebacate
80 dibenzyl sebacate
81 tertiary butyl ethyl ether
82 tertiary butyl mercaptan
83 decane
84 dextron
85 tetra chloro ethane
86 tetrachloroethylene
87 tetrahydrofuran
88 tetra butyl titanate
89 tetralin
90 oil of turpentine
91 tosyl aldinin methyl ether
92 triallylic acid
93 triethylamine
94 tri octyl phosphate
95 tri chlocyl phosphate
96 trichloroethane
97 trichloroethylene
98 tributyl phosphate
99 tributoxyethyl phosphate
100 trifluoro ethane
101 toluene
102 nitro propane
103 nitro benzene
104 nitro methane
105 dibromide ethyl
106 neville acid
107 p-tertiary butyl caltechol
108 hydrazine
109 pinene
110 pyridine
111 phenyl ethyl ether
112 phenyl hydrazine
113 di-octyl phthalate
114 dibutyl phthalate
115 dimetyl phthalate
116 butyl acetyl ricinoleate
117 butyl amine
118 butyl alcohol
119 butyl aldehyde
120 butyl Carbitol
121 furfural
122 furfuryl alcohol
123 freon 32
124 propionic nitril
125 propyl alcohol
126 propylene glycol
127 halotane
128 bromobenzene
129 hexa chloro acetone
130 benzyl alcohol
131 benzene (benzol)
132 benzo trichloride
133 polyethylene glycol
134 form amide
135 mesityl oxide
136 acrylic acid
137 methyl acrylate
138 methanol
139 methyl isobutyl ketone
140 methyl ethyl ketone
141 methyl chloroformate
142 methyl cyclo pentane
143 methyl cellulose
144 methyl cellosolve
145 methyl butyl ketone
146 methyl butyl ether
147 monochloro benzene
148 mono vinyl acetylene
149 mono bromo benzene
150 mono methyl aniline
151 sodium Ritalinic acid
152 linoleic acid
153 ethyl benzoate
154 methyl benzoate
155 acetyl chloride
156 aluminum chloride
157 isobutyl chloride
158 isopropyl chloride
159 cyanogen chloride
160 benzoyl chloride
161 saline water
162 sea water
163 petroleum
164 trichloroacetic acid
165 tetra ethyl lead
166 tetra bromo ethane
167 tetra bromo ethane
168 heavy water
169 amyl acetate
170 isopropyl acetate
171 ethyl acetate
172 vinyl acetate
173 butyl acetate
174 propyl acetate
175 methyl acetate
176 water
177 soapy solution
178 kerosene
179 glacial acetic acid
Blank page.
APPENDIX F FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE
1. Focus adjusting particle............................................................................... F-1
2. Preparation of focus adjustment sample..................................................... F-2
FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 F-1
1. Focus adjusting particle
The focus adjusting particle varies on the type of the sheath fluid.
1) When the PARTICLE SHEATH is used for the sheath fluid:
Use the polystyrene latex particle with 2 micro m in diameter, shown below.
Polystyrene latex particle
Manufacturer: Duke Scientific Corporation
Product name: Polymer Microspheres
Model: 5200A
Particle diameter: 2 m (The particle diameter slightly varies on the production lot.)
Shape: True sphere
Specific gravity: 1.05 g/cm
3

Reflective index: 1.59
Material: polystyrene
2) When the organic solvent is used for the sheath fluid:
When polystyrene latex particle is used, particles may be swelled or melted depending on the
type of the organic solvent. Particles may not be correctly imaged if the reflective index of the
focus adjustment particle is very close to that of the applied organic solvent. It is recommended
to use the melamine resign particle that is resistant to the organic solvent and reflective index
is relatively big.
Melamine resign particle
Manufacturer: Micro Particles GmbH (Germany)
Product name: Melamine Resign Particles
Model: MF-R-2.0
Particle diameter: 2 m (The particle diameter slightly varies on the production lot.)
Shape: True sphere
Specific gravity: 1.51g/cm
3

Reflective index: 1.62
Material: Melamine resign
NOTE: To purchase above mentioned melamine resign particle, contact a Sysmex sales
representative for information.
FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE
F-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005
2. Preparation of focus adjustment sample
The focus adjustment particles are dispersed in the sheath fluid as a dispersion medium, and adjust
the concentration of approx. 30000 particles/L.
CAUTION
Auto focus adjustment may not be correctly functioned, if the sample is not
dispersed and the sample contains lots of agglutinated particles. Prepare the
sample so that the particles are mono-dispersed.
When the auto focus adjustment is performed using a sample that was
prepared in a long time ago, the automatic focusing may not be correctly
functioned due to re-agglutination of the particles. Use such a sample after
dispersing by using an ultrasonic dispersion device.
NOTE: When melamine resign particles are dispersed in the organic solvent as a dispersion
medium, add an appropriate amount of the surfactant in accordance with the applied
organic solvent to obtain a sample without agglutination.
By using the ultrasonic dispersion device, a sample can be prepared with lesser
agglutination.
APPENDIX G ULTRASONIC DISPERSION UNIT MANUAL
(OPTIONAL)
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit)................................ G-1
1.1 Overview.............................................................................................. G-1
2. Settings and Usage.................................................................................... G-2
2.1 Settings Details .................................................................................... G-2
2.2 SOP Settings........................................................................................ G-4
3. Background Count Generated by Erosion.................................................. G-5
3.1 When using the Standard Magnification Unit ....................................... G-5
3.2 When using the High Magnification Unit .............................................. G-6
3.3 When using the Low Magnification Unit ............................................... G-7
4. Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned............................. G-7
ULTRASONIC DISPERSION UNIT MANUAL (OPTIONAL)
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 G-1
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit)
1.1 Overview
Ultrasonic dispersion unit illuminates the sample in the sample chamber in the FPIA-3000 to help
the sample dispersed. Former sample preparation in the ultrasonic bath can be performed in the
FPIA-3000.
The ultrasonic probe which generates the ultrasonic in the Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit is constructed
with a bolted Langevin-type transducer (vibrator) that piezoelectric element is sandwiched between
two metal blocks and an energy concentration horn. The ultrasonic probe is mounted in the position
where the tip of the energy concentration horn is dipped in the sample in the sample mixing
chamber, as shown in the Figure G-1, is energized by the mode set by the FPIA-3000 program
menu, and helps to disperse the sample. The output frequency by the ultrasonic vibrator is
approximately 30 kHz and output energy is approximately 15 W. The output energy can be changed
by the FPIA-3000 program menu.
Figure G-1: Structure of the Ultrasonic Probe
Figure G-2: The Horn Part
Metal block
Piezoelectric element
Metal block
Energy concentration forn
G-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005
2. Settings and Usage
2.1 Settings Details
1 Select [Measure] - [Measure] and the [Testing / Analysis Parameters] dialog appears.
Figure G-3: [Testing / Analysis Parameters] dialog
Place a check mark in the [Edit Testing/Analysis Parameters] and press the [Set Detail]
button. Then, the [Testing Detail Parameters] dialog appears as shown in Figure G-4.
Check Box for "Edit Testing/Analysis Parameters" [Set Detail] Button
Figure G-4: [Testing Detail Parameters] dialog
2 The [Testing Unit Status] displays the setting parameters for the ultrasonic dispersion unit,
as shown in the Table G-1.
Item Explanation Settings
Ultrasonic Power Set the ultrasonic output strength in the range of 5-
100%.
5-100 (%)
Mid-Test Irradiation Set if the ultrasonic scan is performed during testing. Apply/Not Apply
Pre-Test Irradiation
Time
Set the ultrasonic scan time in prior to testing. No
ultrasonic scan is performed if 0 (zero) is set.
0-300 seconds
Table G-1: Explanation of the setting items
Figure G-5: Ultrasonic Scan Sequence
3 After setting each item, press the [Close] button to save the settings.
4 Run the program.
2.2 SOP Settings
Various setting items for the Ultrasonic dispersion unit can be registered in the SOP settings. When
analyzed with selecting the SOP settings that have registered with ultrasonic scan conditions,
ultrasonic scan will be performed automatically.
Refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS for more information on the SOP Settings.
CAUTION
When a sample is supplied to the sample mixing chamber, make sure that the
tip of the horn is dipped in the sample. If ultrasonic scan were performed
without dipping the tip of the horn in the sample, it may cause a permanent
damage to the electronic circuitry.
When ultrasonic scan is performed, a background count arises due to the
erosion.
When analyzing with irradiating the ultrasonic dispersion unit, confirm that the
background count by the erosion will not affect the results significantly. Refer to
the "4.Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned" for the
background count by the erosion.
The erosion is defined that the tip of the horn is damaged by the ultrasonic
shock generated by itself and a part of the horn is disengaged.
It should be noted that when ultrasonic scan is performed for a prolonged period
of time, the sample temperature will be arisen due to the heated horn. Refer to
the Appendix G:"4.Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned" for
the arisen temperature.
The sample dispersion effect will depend on the ultrasonic scan strength,
sample volume and the type of dispersion medium.
WARNING
The Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit shall be used only if its sheath liquid is "PARTICLE
SHEATH" or "Water".
Do not use any combustible liquid(such as alcohol) as sheath liquid because of
ignition.
Testing sequence
Preparing
in prior to
testing
Displaying a
dialog waiting
for sample
introduction
Ultrasonic
irradiation in
prior to testing
Testing
Sample
introduction
Pre-Test Irradiation Testing
Ultrasonic scan
is performed in
prior to testing
for the time set
in the "Pre-Test
Irradiation Time".
Ultrasonic scan
is performed if
"Mid-Test Irradiation"
is set to "Apply".
3. Background Count Generated by Erosion
When ultrasonic scan is performed, the tip of the horn is disengaged due to erosion. This increases
the background count. The disengaged particle size is distributed in the area less than 10 m. The
reference background count is shown in the Tables G-2 through G-7. Please use these tables as a
reference because the background count by erosion varies depending on the material itself.
3.1 When using the Standard Magnification Unit
When 1 minute of ultrasonic scan is performed in the 5 mL of PARTICLE SHEATH as a sample,
the background count (effective analyzed count) is shown in the Table G-2.
When 1 minute of ultrasonic scan is performed in the 2.5 mL of PARTICLE SHEATH as a sample,
Ultrasound strength Background count (effective analyzed count)
HPFx20 LPFx5
5% Approx. 5 counts Approx. 5 counts
Table G-2:
HPFx20 LPFx5
Table G-3:
3.2 When using the High Magnification Unit
HPFx40 LPFx10
Table G-4:
HPFx40 LPFx10
Table G-5:
3.3 When using the Low Magnification Unit
4. Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic Scanned
The sample temperature will arise approximately 10C when the ultrasonic scan strength is 100%,
the scan time is 10 minutes and the dispersion medium is 5 mL of PARTICLE SHEATH.
HPFx10 LPFx2.5
Table G-6:
HPFx10 LPFx2.5
Table G-7:
Blank page.
APPENDIX H HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT
MANUAL (OPTION)
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Lens Unit.................................................................... H-1
1.1 Features............................................................................................... H-1
1.2 General Information of the Lens Unit ................................................... H-2
2. Installation .................................................................................................. H-3
2.1 Preparation for installation ................................................................... H-3
2.2 Installation (Changing hardware) ......................................................... H-4
3. Preparation for testing.............................................................................. H-11
3.1 Starting the analysis program ............................................................ H-11
4. Testing...................................................................................................... H-18
5. Analyze..................................................................................................... H-19
6. SOP settings ............................................................................................ H-20
7. Specifications (High Magnification Objective Lens Unit) .......................... H-21
8. Specifications (Low Magnification Objective Lens Unit) ........................... H-26
HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION)
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 H-1
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Lens Unit
1.1 Features
FPIA-3000 is built with 10x objective lens as a standard unit. FPIA-3000 has an optional lens unit,
which includes 5x and 20x objective lens. These lens can be replaced by each customer.
By using the appropriate lens unit that fits for the customer application of each sample size, variety
of samples can be measured accurately.
H-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
1.2 General Information of the Lens Unit
FPIA-3000 is designed to change the magnification by replacing the objective lens and ND (Neutral
Density) filter. The Lens Unit is for the replacement lens unit and is consisted of the following
parts.
High or Low Magnification Lens can be used after replacing and adjusting the objective lens and
ND filter.
When the optional Lens Unit is used, the measuring magnification and the measuring range of the
FPIA-3000 is as follows.
Lens Unit Objective lens ND Filter
High Magnification Unit LUCPLFLN 20x AND-40C-70
Low Magnification Unit UMPLFL 5x AND-40C-50
Standard Unit UPLSAPO 10x AND-40C-20
Table H-1: Consisted Parts in the Lens Unit
Lens Unit Magnification
of Objective
lens
Measurement
mode
Total Magnifi-
cation
Measurement
Range (um)
High Magnification
Unit
20x HPF (High Power Field) 40x 0.8 - 20
LPF (Low Power Field) 10x 4.0 - 80
Low Magnification
Unit
5x HPF (High Power Field) 10x 3.0 - 80
LPF (Low Power Field) 2.5x 16.0 - 300
Standard Unit 10x HPF (High Power Field) 20x 1.5 - 40
LPF (Low Power Field) 5x 8.0 - 160
Table H-2: FPIA-3000 Measuring Magnification and Measuring Range with High or Low
Magnification Lens Unit
2. Installation
2.1 Preparation for installation
2.1.1. Introduction
Initial installation and settings will be performed by a Sysmex service representative. After the
initial installation and settings, replacing the lens unit can be performed by the customer.
2.1.2. Unpacking Check List
FPIA-3000 Lens Unit is consisted of the following parts. At the initial installation or when
replacing the lens unit, check that all necessary parts exist and no significant damage is observed.
High Magnification Unit
Low Magnification Unit
Description Remarks
Objective
lens
LUCPLFLN 20x Magnification: 20x
N.A. (Numerical Aperture): 0.45
ND Filter AND-40C-70 Transmittancy: 70%
Table H-3: Unpacking Check List (High Magnification Unit)
Description Remarks
Objective
lens
UMPLFL 5x Magnification: 5x
N.A. (Numerical Aperture): 0.15
ND Filter AND-40C-70 Transmittancy: 70%
Table H-4: Unpacking Check List (Low Magnification Unit)
2.2 Installation (Changing hardware)
Perform the hardware changes in (1) replacing the objective lens, (2) replacing the ND filter, and
(3) adjusting the condenser N.A., as follows.
Figure H-1: Remove the testing unit covers
2 Remove the testing unit covers and return the drive unit to its original place.
Figure H-2: Return the drive unit to its original place
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power prior to changing hardware.
Testing unit cover
Drive unit
Figure H-3: Remove the central cover fastening screws
cover.
Figure H-4: Detach the LED cable
Pay attention not to forcibly pull the LED cable.
Figure H-5: Remove the central cover
LED cable
Central cover
Figure H-6: Remove the shade cover fastening screws
Figure H-7: Remove the shade cover
Shade cover
Shade cover
8 Loosen the lens holder fixing screw and draw out the lens holder completely.
Figure H-8: Remove the lens holder
9 Replace the objective lens by the desired one.
Figure H-9: Replace the objective lens
10Fit the lens holder into the testing unit so that the portion with no corners is innermost. Slide the
lens holder all the way until it hits the positioning pin.
11Use the lens holder fastening screw to fasten the lens holder.
Figure H-10: Fasten the lens holder
Lens holder
Objective lens
Lens holder
Lens holder
12Loosen the ND filter fixing screw, and remove the ND filter. Place the desired ND filter and
tighten the ND filter with the ND filter fixing screw. (Pay attention to the direction of the ND
filter. See Figure H-12 for the direction.)
Figure H-11: Replace the ND filter
Figure H-12: Mounting direction of the ND filter
Install the ND filter so that the fixture is positioned to the right-hand side.
ND Filter Fixing Screws
Fixture
13Loosen the locking screw for the condenser NA adjustment knob.
Figure H-13: Loosen the locking screw for the N.A. adjustment knob
14Adjust the NA adjustment knob at the position shown in the following table, and tighten the
locking screw.
Lens Unit Position of the NA adjustment knob
Standard Unit
Align the Surface A, which is the facing surface of the NA adjustment knob, at
the graduated dial 0.2
High Magnification
Unit
the graduated dial 0.2
Table H-5: Adjust the NA adjustment knob
Locking screw
NA Adjustment Knob
Surface A
Surface A
15Return the covers to their original positions.
16Perform the same procedures when the optional lens unit is replaced by the standard unit.
Low Magnification
Unit
the minimum graduated dial.
Lens Unit Position of the NA adjustment knob
Table H-5: Adjust the NA adjustment knob
Surface A
3. Preparation for testing
3.1.1. Starting the testing unit
Turn ON the power switch by referring to Chapter 3: "2. Turning on the device".
3.1.2. Starting the Analysis Program
1 Double click on the FPIA-3000 shortcut on the Windows desktop.
2 Enter the logon ID and password as in table H-6. Press the [Setting] button to change the
objective lens.
Figure H-14: [Logon] dialog
NOTE: If the FPIA-3000 does not start, use one of the procedures below to start it.
- Click through [Windows taskbar] - [Start] button - [Programs] - [Sysmex] - [FPIA-
3000].
- Double click on [FPIA-3000.exe], which is directly below the install folder.
Set Items Explanations
Logon ID Enter the previously assigned login ID.
Refer to the FPIA-3000 Operators Manual, Chapter 13, USER
AUTHENTICATION for the acceptable characters.
The input password will be displayed as a string of asterisks "*". Refer to the
FPIA-3000 Operators Manual, Chapter 13, USER AUTHENTICATION for the
acceptable characters.
check box
Place a check mark in the [Start Testing Unit] check box, when only the stored
data is reviewed and you do not need to start the Testing Unit.
[Setting] button Displays [Logon Setting] dialog.
[OK] button Starts up the Testing Unit and analysis software.
[Cancel] button Cancels Testing Unit startup.
Table H-6: Logon screen items
Figure H-15: [Logon] dialog
3 Press the down arrow of the LensUnit Setting to select an Objective lens to use from the Lens Unit
installed in FPIA-3000. You can select 5X (Low magnification), 10X (Standard), or 20X (High).
4 After selecting an objective lens, press [OK] to return to the [Logon] dialog.
5 Press the [OK] button in the [Logon] dialog.
If selected is a different Objective Lens that were used in the last time when shut down, the
Figure H-16: Logon Dialog (Selected Lens Unit is different)
If OK, press the [Yes] button. The process will continue. If [No] is pressed, you will return to the
[Logon] dialog.
3.1.3. Replacing the Sheath Fluid
If the sheath fluid is PARTICLE SHEATH
1 Run the program.
Figure H-17: [Startup Sequence] dialog
If the sheath fluid is not PARTICLE SHEATH
1 Run the program.
If the system was using alcohol the last time it was shut down, the following dialog box will appear:
Press to change the sheath fluid.
A list of sheath fluid options is displayed, so select the one to use.
Figure H-18: [Startup Settings] dialog
2 Connect the sheath fluid to be used to the sheath fluid aspiration nipple.
Figure H-19: Sheath fluid replacement
3 Check that the tube is correctly connected to the sheath fluid aspiration nipple, then press the
[Run] button.
Figure H-20: [Cleaning pressure settings] dialog
4 Set the cleaning pressure to match the sheath fluid used.
When the pressure display turns green, press the [Run] button. (See Chapter 14, 2.3.
"Adjustment of rinse pressure") The startup process runs.
Sheath fluid aspiration nipple
Sheath fluid
container
If the following dialog was displayed during the startup of the Testing Unit, press the [Alarm Reset]
button, stop the alarm, and press the [Error Recovery] button after the button becomes effective.
Figure H-21: [Error History] dialog
When the error is resolved, the start process will continue.
If the error cannot be resolved, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.
Execute the process described in the 3.1.4."Process executed after replacing the Lens Unit".
If the FPIA-3000 is run without replacing the Lens Unit, execute the procedures described in the
3.1.5."Background Check" and following sections.
NOTE: After switching the instrument power on, wait approximately one hour for its internal
Once the internal temperature of the instrument has stabilized, follow the procedure
on the next page to run a background check and auto focus adjustment.
3.1.4. Process executed after replacing the Lens Unit
Immediately after replacing the Lens Unit, focusing and electronic flash brightness are out of
alignment. It is necessary to execute the sequences of the flash brightness adjustment and the
manual focus adjustment.
When the background check dialog is displayed, press the [No] button to skip the background
check.
Figure H-22: [Background check] dialog
When the automatic focusing adjustment dialog is displayed, press the [No] button to skip the
automatic focusing adjustment.
Figure H-23: [Focus Adjusting] dialog
Select [Maintenance] - [Sequence] - [Adjustment of the flash brightness].
The testing unit is adjusted with the most appropriate stroboscope brightness.
Then perform the manual focus adjustment, by referring to Chapter 15: "2.3 Manual focusing".
Then, perform the background check and the automatic focus adjustment by referring to Chapter 3:
"3.3 Background Check" and Chapter 3: "3.4 Auto Focusing".
3.1.5. Background Check
Perform the background check by referring to Chapter 3: "3.3 Background Check".
3.1.6. Automatic Focus Adjustment
Perform the automatic focus adjustment by referring to Chapter 3: "3.4 Auto Focusing".
1 Check Magnification
Select [Test]-[Test]. The [Testing / Analysis Parameters] dialog appears.
Figure H-24: [Testing / Analysis Parameters] dialog
The selected lens magnification is displayed to the right of the measurement and analytical
conditions.
NOTE: To perform the automatic focus adjustment, prepare 5 mL or more of the certain
concentration of the adjustment fluid to make the focus adjustment latex dispersed in
the PARTICLE SHEATH.
Lens Unit Original Latex fluid Concentration
High Magnification Unit DUKE Latex fluid 5100A
(1.0 m)
Approx. 200,000/L
Low Magnification Unit DUKE Latex fluid 5312A
(3.1 m)
Approx. 5,000/L
Standard Unit DUKE Latex fluid 5200A
(2.0 m)
Approx. 30,000/L
Table H-7: Latex fluid for the automatic focus adjustment
4. Testing
For the testing procedures, refer to Chapter 4, TESTING.
If you have any troubles, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.
5. Analyze
For the data analysis, refer to Chapter 5, RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING.
Followings are the notes specifically applied to the optional Lens Unit.
CAUTION
Two records which were obtained in the different magnifications will not be
merged.
overlapped of their graphs.
graphed or trended.
6. SOP settings
For the explanation, use, register, edit and delete of SOP, refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS.
7. Specifications (High Magnification Objective Lens Unit)
Purpose
Test Conditions
1) Subjects of analysis
2) Dispersion media
Water based:PARTICLE SHEATH
Alcohol based:Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%)
* Accuracy of test data obtained using alcohol-based sheath fluid or dispersion medium is not
guaranteed.
3) Test range
When HPF is independently tested: 0.8 to 20 m
When LPF is independently tested: 4.0 to 80 m
Circularity measurement range: 0.200-1.000
When HPF is independently tested: 360,000 cells/L when particles of which diameter is
approximately 0.5 to 3 m are measured.
When LPF is independently tested: 360,000 cells/L when particles of which diameter is
approximately 4 m are measured.
5) Required sample volume: 5 mL
6) Throughput
7) Sample volume analyzed
HPF mode: Approx. 0.035 L
LPF mode: Approx. 0.55 L
HPF test mode Approx. 170 s Approx. 21 samples per hour
LPF test mode Approx. 170 s Approx. 21 samples per hour
Table H-8: Throughput
Test items and display items
1) Analysis parameters
The analysis parameters are the same as the standard unit. Refer to Appendix B,
SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S.
2) Displayed Items
The display items are the same as the standard unit. Refer to Appendix B, SPECIFICATION
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S.
Required reagents and their consumption
At startup
During Testing
At shutdown
When replacing sheath fluid
Ambient temperature: 15 - 30C
Relative humidity: 30 - 85%
NOTE: When the sheath fluid and dispersion media are not PARTICLE SHEATH, analysis
results other than the area, circular diameter and circularity are not guaranteed.
Reagents used Consumption
PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic rinse) Approx. 90 mL
PARTICLE SHEATH (for background checking) Approx. 70 mL
PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic focus adjustment) Approx. 170 mL
Reagent to be replaced (PARTICLE SHEATH or alcohol) Approx. 710 mL
Table H-9: Reagents and their consumption
Precision
1) Accuracy
Average values when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the samples
Item Analysis
mode
Sample Particle
diameter
(m)
Concentration
(x10
3
particles/
mL)
Standard
values:
Average
diameter
HPF Duke Latex 3800A 0.8 Approx. 10,000 3%
HPF Duke Latex 4205A 5 Approx. 1,000 3%
HPF Duke Latex 4220A 20 Approx. 200 3%
LPF Duke Latex 4220A 20 Approx. 200 3%
Average
circularity
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 0.5%
LPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 0.5%
Particle
density
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 10%
LPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 10%
Table H-10: Accuracy
Coefficients of variation when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the
samples below are measured ten times in succession will be within the range of rated values
below.
Item Analysis
mode
Sample Particle
diameter
(m)
Concentration
(x10
3
particles/
mL)
Standard
values
Average
diameter
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 1%
LPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 1%
10%
diameter
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 3%
LPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 3%
90%
diameter
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 3%
LPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 3%
Average
circularity
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 0.3%
LPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 0.3%
Particle
density
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSH-100A)
2 Approx. 20,000 10%
LPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 10%
Table H-11: Reproducibility
3) Carryover
Carryover rates when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the samples
below are measured will be within the range of rated values below.
1 m PSL, approx. 1,700,000 x103pieces/mL (DUKE Latex 5100A)
guaranteed by Duke Scientific Corporation on the basis of NIST (National Institute of
Standards and Technology) standards.
Standard particles for FPIA by Sysmex are independently developed, produced and
managed by Sysmex as standard substances for measurement of average circularity
and particle density by the FPIA-3000.
8. Specifications (Low Magnification Objective Lens Unit)
Purpose
Test Conditions
1) Subjects of analysis
2) Dispersion media
Water based: PARTICLE SHEATH
Alcohol based: Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, ethylene glycol solution (25 wt%)
* Accuracy of test data obtained using alcohol-based sheath fluid or dispersion
medium is not guaranteed.
3) Test range
When HPF is independently tested: 3.0 to 80 m
When LPF is independently tested: 16 to 300 m
Circularity measurement range: 0.200-1.000
When HPF is independently tested: 8,000 cells/L when particles of which diameter is
approximately 3 to 12 m are measured.
When LPF is independently tested: 8,000 cells/L when particles of which diameter is
approximately 16 m are measured.
5) Required sample volume: 5 mL
6) Throughput
7) Sample volume analyzed
HPF mode: Approx. 1.55 L
LPF mode: Approx. 10.5 L
HPF test mode Approx. 170 s Approx. 21 samples per hour
LPF test mode Approx. 170 s Approx. 21 samples per hour
Table H-12: Throughput
Test items and display items
1) Analysis parameters
The analysis parameters are the same as the standard unit. Refer to Appendix B,
SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S.
2) Displayed Items
The displayed items are the same as the standard unit. Refer to Appendix B, SPECIFICATION
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FPIA-3000/3000S.
Required reagents and their consumption
At startup
During Testing
At shutdown
When replacing sheath fluid
Ambient temperature: 15 - 30C
Relative humidity: 30% to 85%
NOTE: When the sheath fluid and dispersion media are not PARTICLE SHEATH, analysis
results other than the area, circular diameter and circularity are not guaranteed.
PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic rinse) Approx. 90 mL
PARTICLE SHEATH (for background checking) Approx. 70 mL
PARTICLE SHEATH (for automatic focus adjustment) Approx. 170 mL
Reagent to be replaced (PARTICLE SHEATH or alcohol) Approx. 710 mL
Table H-13: Reagents and their consumption
Precision
1) Accuracy
Average values when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the samples
Item Analysis
mode
Sample Particle
diameter
(m)
Concen-
tration
(x10
3
par-
ticles/mL)
Standard values
Average
diameter
HPF Duke Latex 4203A 3 Approx.
500
3%
Average
circularity
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx.
1,000
0.5%
LPF - - - -
Particle
density
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx.
1,000
10%
LPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx.
1,000
10%
Table H-14: Accuracy
Coefficients of variation when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the
samples below are measured ten times in succession will be within the range of rated values
below.
3) Carryover
Carryover rates when PARTICLE SHEATH is used as the dispersion medium and the samples
below are measured will be within the range of rated values below.
3.1 m PSL, approx. 40,000 x103pieces/mL (DUKE Latex 5312A)
Item Analysis
mode
Sample Diameter
(m)
Concentration
(x10
3
particles/
mL)
Standard
values
Average
diameter
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 1%
10%
diameter
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 3%
90%
diameter
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 3%
Average
circularity
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 0.3%
LPF Duke Latex 7545A 42 Approx. 100 0.3%
Particle
density
HPF Sysmex FPIA
Standard Particle
(FSL-100A)
16 Approx. 1,000 10%
Table H-15: Reproducibility
guaranteed by Duke Scientific Corporation on the basis of NIST (National Institute of
Standards and Technology) standards.
Standard particles for FPIA by Sysmex are independently developed, produced and
managed by Sysmex as standard substances for measurement of average circularity
and particle density by the FPIA-3000.
Blank page.
APPENDIX I PART11 SOFTWARE MANUAL (OPTIONAL)
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Software Conforming to Part 11)......................... I-1
1.1 Features................................................................................................. I-1
2. Installation of the Part 11 Software .............................................................. I-2
2.1 Install ...................................................................................................... I-2
3. Using the FPIA-3000 Part 11 Software ........................................................ I-3
3.1 Preparation for testing............................................................................ I-3
3.2 Testing ................................................................................................... I-3
3.3 Stored Data Display and Processing ..................................................... I-3
3.4 Error Treatment ...................................................................................... I-3
3.5 SOP settings .......................................................................................... I-3
3.6 User Verification..................................................................................... I-3
3.7 Audit Trail Function ................................................................................ I-4
3.8 Others .................................................................................................... I-4
4. Audit trail ...................................................................................................... I-6
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ I-6
4.2 Reviewing audit trail ............................................................................... I-6
4.3 CSV Export ............................................................................................ I-8
4.4 Print........................................................................................................ I-8
4.5 Filter ....................................................................................................... I-9
PART11 SOFTWARE MANUAL (OPTIONAL)
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005 I-1
1. FPIA-3000 Optional Unit (Software Conforming to Part 11)
1.1 Features
The optional software conforming to 21 CFR Part 11 is based on the guidelines shown by the
United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA), and provides following functions.
Audit trail function
FPIA-3000 operation histories are stored in a record as an audit trail.
Conforms to the electronic signature
Analysis results can be output in the form of a PDF file with an electronic signature, which is
a feature of PDFs.
Individuals authentication function
Different access levels can be set for different logon users so as to limit the features that users
can use according to their access level. FPIA-3000 standard functions include this. For more
information refer to Chapter 13, USER AUTHENTICATION.
NOTE: The 21 CFR (Code of federal regulations) Part 11 is a mandatory regulation of the
United States Food and Drug Administration for the electronic submission, electronic
records and electronic signature of the application documents.
The PDF (Portable Document Format) is a publicly available file format used to
distribute and exchange the electronic document through the internet.
I-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised December 2005
2. Installation of the Part 11 Software
2.1 Install
Installation of the Part 11 software is performed by a Sysmex representative.
CAUTION
Once the Part 11 software was installed on the FPIA-3000, you cannot uninstall
the Part 11 software.
3. Using the FPIA-3000 Part 11 Software
3.1 Preparation for testing
Prepare the sample by referring to the Chapter 3, PREPARATIONS FOR TESTING.
3.2 Testing
Test the sample by referring to the Chapter 4, TESTING.
3.3 Stored Data Display and Processing
Table I-1 shows the differences between the standard application and the Part 11 application.
3.4 Error Treatment
For the procedures to treat an error, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.
3.5 SOP settings
The differences from the FPIA-3000 standard application are shown below.
The [Del.SOP] and [Save] button are removed in the SOP Settings dialog, and deleting and
saving the SOP are not possible. For details, refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS.
3.6 User Verification
The differences from the FPIA-3000 standard application are shown below.
The [Delete] button is removed in the user information dialog, and deleting the registered user is
not possible.
CAUTION
If the number of stored records exceeds 1000, a message You cannot run.
The number of records exceeds the upper limit. is displayed and you cannot
run a test.
If this happens, select [File] - [New] to create a new database to store test
records. For details, see Chapter 5 RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING
10.2 NEW in this manual.
You can run the background check and automatic focus adjustment, even if the
number of stored records exceeds 1000.
3.7 Audit Trail Function
This is a newly added function to the Part 11 application. This function automatically records the
operation histories that relates to the analysis results submitted to FDA. For details, refer to 4. Audit
trail.
3.8 Others
For the Quality Control, Display Setup, Print Format, System Adjustment and Maintenance, refer
to the appropriate chapter in the FPIA-3000 Operators manual.
Item Standard Software Part 11 Software
Stored Data Display and Processing
Sort functions Yes Yes
Filter function Yes Yes
Search functions Yes Yes
Display reset Yes Yes
Edit Sample information Yes Not available
Batch reanalyze Yes Available only batch reanalyze
and save as function
Deletion Yes Not available
Changing the record display Yes Yes
Processing analysis results
Moving records Yes Yes
Thumbnail image display Yes Yes
Reanalyze using altered analysis
conditions
Yes Available to reanalyze, but not
available to save overwritten. If
the number of records exceeds
1000, not available to reanalyze
Merging records Yes If the number of records exceeds
1000, not available to merge
Changing the display of the Analysis
Results screen
Yes Yes
Particle image list
Particle image list Yes Yes
Detailed information display Yes Yes
Frequency tables Yes Yes
Multi Scattergrams Yes Yes
Graph (Overlay-View) Yes Yes
Detail Results Yes Yes
Graph (Trend-View) Yes Yes
Table I-1: Comparison between Standard and Part 11 Software
File menu
New Yes Yes
Open Yes Yes
Save as Yes Yes
Print Yes Yes
CSV Yes Yes
Data Transmission Yes Yes
PDF Yes Yes
User Authentication Yes Yes(but cannot delete user data)
SOP Settings Yes Yes(but cannot delete SOP
information)
Audit Trail Not available Yes
Sheath liquid Setting Yes(only FPIA-3000S) Not available
CAUTION
For the specifications of the audit trail, refer to 4. Audit trail.
Item Standard Software Part 11 Software
Table I-1: Comparison between Standard and Part 11 Software
4. Audit trail
4.1 Introduction
The audit trail function automatically records the operation histories that relate to the analysis
results submitted to FDA.
4.2 Reviewing audit trail
Select [Maintenance] - [Audit Trail] to display all the recorded events list as shown in Figure I-1.
Figure I-1: Audit Trail dialog
Item Functions
CSV button Press the [CSV] button to save the contents displayed in the audit trail
dialog in the CSV file.
Print button Press the [Print] button to print the contents displayed in the audit trail
dialog.
Filter button The contents in the audit trail list can be sorted by date, user and
events.
Close button Close the audit trail dialog.
Table I-2: Explanation of the audit trail dialog
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 I-7
Contents displayed in the audit trail dialog are explained below.
Date:
Records the date and time when the event is written in the audit trail.
User:
Records the logged-on user name.
Events:
Records the event item occurred when an event item listed in the Table I-3 was executed.
Details:
Records the details of the event item in the details column when an event item listed in the Table I-
3 is executed.
Event item Details
Run a calibration (particle diameter) Records that the calibration information is updated.
Run a calibration (concentration) Records that the calibration information is updated.
Run an automatic focusing Records that the auto focus adjustment is performed.
Run a background check Records the background count.
Replace the Sheath liquid Records the Sheath liquid name after replaced.
Change or add the sheath liquid
setting(*1)
*1.These functions can be utilized only in FPIA-3000S.
Records the changed item and set value.
Change the detector Records the Light field system and the magnification after
replaced.
Change the ultrasonic unit Records whether the ultrasonic dispersion unit is installed.
Add or change SOP Records the subjected SOP name.
Change system settings Records the changed item.
Change the user group Records the changed user group name and the changed
contents.
Register a user Records the registered user name.
Change the user registration Records the registered user name and changed contents.
Logging on Records the logged-on user name.
Unauthorized access Records the fact that the account is prohibited to logon.
Table I-3: Explanation of the audit trail contents
4.3 CSV Export
Click on the [CSV] button in the audit trail dialog. A dialog shown in Figure I-2 will be displayed.
Figure I-2: [Audit Trail Save As] dialog
Set the desired directory, enter the file name and save the CSV file.
4.4 Print
Click the [Print] button in the audit trail dialog, a printer setting dialog will be displayed and the
contents in the audit trail dialog can be printed.
The printer setting dialog conforms to the one installed in the personal computer.
Refer to your printer manual for details.
4.5 Filter
Click on the [Filter] button in the audit trail dialog to display the [Audit Trail Filter] dialog, as
shown in Figure I-3.
Place a checkmark in the [Specified Execute as for the filter], check the audit trail filter items
listed in the Table I-4, and click the [OK] button to display the filtered audit trail list in the audit
trail list dialog.
Figure I-3: [Audit Trail filter] dialog
Item Explanation
Check box to Specify the filter Place a checkmark to validate the filter conditions in the audit
trail. Filtered audit trails are listed.
Check box for user name and its list
box
Place a checkmark in the user name check box, and user
name can be selected in the user name list box, which is used
to filter the audit trails list.
Check box for event and its list box Place a checkmark in the event check box, and event can be
selected in the event list box, which is used to filter the audit
trails list.
Check box for date, today/date radio
button, and date list box
Place a checkmark in the date check box, select a radio
button either today or specified date, and the specified date
condition is used to filter the audit trails list. When specified
date radio button is selected, date range can be specified.
Table I-4: Audit trails filter items
Blank page.
APPENDIX J FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL
1. Overview ..................................................................................................... J-1
1.1 Overview............................................................................................... J-1
1.2 Principle of Dark Field Test ................................................................... J-1
2. Installation ................................................................................................... J-2
3. Specifications .............................................................................................. J-3
4. Changing hardware..................................................................................... J-4
5. Starting the analysis program.................................................................... J-10
5.1 Starting the analysis program ............................................................. J-10
5.2 Replacing the Sheath Fluid................................................................. J-12
5.3 Process executed after replacing the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit ....... J-15
5.4 Checking Light Field System............................................................... J-15
6. Testing....................................................................................................... J-16
7. Analyze...................................................................................................... J-17
8. SOP settings ............................................................................................. J-18
9. Maintenance.............................................................................................. J-28
9.1 Quality Control .................................................................................... J-28
9.2 Adjustment of the flash brightness...................................................... J-28
FPIA-3000 DARK FIELD UNIT MANUAL
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 J-1
1. Overview
1.1 Overview
FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit is an optional unit for particle imaging and image analysis using dark
field optical system. The Dark Field Unit can be used for measurement after replacement and
adjustment of the illumination lens, and software setting change. The unit can be replaced by each
customer.
* The unit is not supporting the High and Low Magnification options.
1.2 Principle of Dark Field Test
The ring slit for dark field illumination is used to shut out the direct illumination to the objective
lens.
The background is dark since the direct illumination is shut out. When particles exist, scattered light
by particles reaches to the objective lens, and the bright white image of the particle can be obtained.
(Refer to the figure below.)
In the case of dark filed mode, only the images brighter than the background are recognized as
particles, and analyzed.
Figure J-1: Principle of Dark Field Test
Ring slit
Sample
Condenser lens
Dotted line arrow : Scattered light (light scattered by particles reaches to the objective lens)
Solid line arrow : Illumination
Objective lens
J-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
2. Installation
Initial installation and settings will be performed by a Sysmex service representative. After the
initial installation and settings, replacement of the lens unit can be performed by each customer.
3. Specifications
Refer to APPENDIX B for the Specifications/Performances of FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S mounted
with the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit.
4. Changing hardware
Perform the hardware changes as follows.
Figure J-2: Remove the testing unit covers
2 Remove the testing unit covers and return the drive unit to its original place.
Figure J-3: Return the drive unit to its original place
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power prior to changing hardware.
Testing unit cover
Drive unit
Figure J-4: Remove the central cover fastening screws
cover.
Figure J-5: Detach the LED cable
Pay attention not to forcibly pull the LED cable.
Figure J-6: Remove the central cover
LED cable
Central cover
Figure J-7: Remove the shade cover fastening screws
Figure J-8: Remove the shade cover
Shade cover
Shade cover
8 Loosen the ND filter fixing screw, and remove the ND filter.
Figure J-9: Remove the ND filter
9 Remove the Illumination Lens.
Figure J-10: Remove the Illumination Lens
ND Filter Fixing Screws
Illumination lens
10Attach the Illumination Lens for dark field.
Figure J-11: Attach the Illumination Lens for dark field
* In the case of installing the illumination lens/illumination lens for dark field, align the triangle
arrow at the graduated dial 0.5 as shown in the figure below.
Figure J-12: Aligning the triangle arrow
Illumination lens
for dark field
11Loosen the locking screw for the condenser NA adjustment knob.
12Move the condenser NA adjustment knob all the way in the direction of the arrow.
Figure J-13: Loosen the locking screw for the condenser NA adjustment knob
13Return the covers to their original positions.
14In the case of the replacement of FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit with the standard unit, turn off the
power and perform the following procedures.
Procedures for the replacement of FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit with the standard unit
1) Remove the covers.
2) Adjust the condenser NA adjustment knob.
For the position of the condenser NA adjustment knob, refer to the Figures on H-9 & H-10 of
APPENDIX H, HIGH/LOW MAGNIFICATION LENS UNIT MANUAL (OPTION).
3) Replace the illumination lens.
Replace the illumination lens for dark field with the standard illumination lens.
4) Return the ND filter to its original position.
5) Return the other covers.
After the hardware change, start the analysis program and change settings.
Locking screw
NA Adjustment Knob
5. Starting the analysis program
Start the analysis program as follows.
1 Turn ON the power switch of the testing unit by referring to the Chapter 3, Turning on the device.
2 Double click on the FPIA-3000 shortcut on the Windows desktop.
3 Enter the logon ID and password as in table J-6. Press the [Setting] button to change the Light
field system.
Figure J-14: [Logon] dialog
NOTE: If the FPIA-3000 does not start, use one of the procedures below to start it.
- Click through [Windows taskbar] - [Start] button - [Programs] - [Sysmex] - [FPIA-
3000].
- Double click on [FPIA-3000.exe], which is directly below the install folder.
Set Items Explanations
Logon ID Enter the previously assigned logon ID.
Refer to the FPIA-3000 Operator's Manual, Chapter 13, USER
AUTHENTICATION for the acceptable characters.
The input password will be displayed as a string of asterisks * . Refer to the
FPIA-3000 Operator's Manual, Chapter 13, USER AUTHENTICATION for the
acceptable characters.
check box
Place a check mark in the [Start Testing Unit] check box, when only the stored
data is reviewed and you do not need to start the Testing Unit.
[Setting] button Displays [Logon Setting] dialog.
[OK] button Starts up the Testing Unit and analysis software.
[Cancel] button Cancels Testing Unit startup.
Table J-1: Logon screen items
Figure J-15: [Logon Setting] dialog
4 Press the down arrow of the Light field system to select a Light field system to use from the
systems installed in FPIA-3000. You can choose Bright field or Dark field.
5 After selecting the Light field system to use, press the [OK] button to return to the [Logon]
dialog.
6 Press the [OK] button of the [Logon] dialog.
If the selected Light field system is different from the one used at the last shutdown, the following
Figure J-16: Logon dialog (Selected Light field system is different)
If OK, press the [Yes] button. The process will continue. If [No] is pressed, you will return to the
[Logon] dialog.
5.2 Replacing the Sheath Fluid
If the sheath fluid is PARTICLE SHEATH
1 Run the program.
Figure J-17: [Startup Sequence] dialog
If the sheath fluid is not PARTICLE SHEATH
1 Run the program.
If the system was using alcohol at the last shutdown, the following dialog box will appear:
Press to change the sheath fluid.
A list of sheath fluid options is displayed, so select the one to use.
Figure J-18: [Startup Settings] dialog
2 Connect the sheath fluid to be used to the sheath fluid aspiration nipple.
Figure J-19: Sheath fluid replacement
3 Check that the tube is correctly connected to the sheath fluid aspiration nipple, then press the
[Run] button.
Figure J-20: [Cleaning pressure settings] dialog
4 Set the cleaning pressure to match the sheath fluid used.
When the pressure display turns green, press the [Run] button. (See Chapter 14, 2.3.
"Adjustment of rinse pressure") The startup process runs.
NOTE: After switching the instrument power on, wait approximately one hour for its internal
Once the internal temperature of the instrument has stabilized, follow the procedure
on the following pages to run a background check and auto focus adjustment.
sheath liquid aspiration nipple
Connect to sheath liquid container
If the following dialog was displayed during the startup of the Testing Unit, press the [Stop
Alarm] button, stop the alarm, and press the [Recover] button after the button becomes effective.
Figure J-21: [Error History] dialog
When the error is resolved, the start process will continue.
If the error cannot be resolved, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.
Execute the process described in the 5.3 Process executed after replacing the FPIA-3000 Dark
Field Unit after switching to the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit.
5.3 Process executed after replacing the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit
Immediately after replacing to the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit, it is necessary to execute the
sequence of the manual focus adjustment.
When the background check dialog is displayed, press the [No] button to skip the background
check.
Figure J-22: [Background Check] dialog
When the automatic focusing adjustment dialog is displayed, press the [No] button to skip the
automatic focusing adjustment.
Figure J-23: [Focus Adjusting] dialog
Perform the manual focus adjustment, by referring to Chapter 15: "2.3 Manual focusing".
Then perform the background check and the automatic focus adjustment by referring to Chapter 3:
"3.3 Background Check" and Chapter 3: "3.4 Auto Focusing".
5.4 Checking Light Field System
In the case of Dark Field Unit, DF appears in the title of the main screen.
Figure J-24: Main screen
6. Testing
For the testing procedures, refer to Chapter 4, TESTING.
NOTE: If you have any troubles, refer to Chapter 7, TROUBLESHOOTING.
7. Analyze
For the data analysis, refer to Chapter 5, RECORD DISPLAY AND PROCESSING.
The following is the note specifically applied to the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit.
CAUTION
Two records obtained in the different light field systems will not be merged.
8. SOP settings
For the explanation, use, register, edit and delete of SOP, refer to Chapter 8, SOP SETTINGS.
The following tables explain SOP settings dialog displayed when [Settings] - [SOP] is selected.
Groups Items Units
Testing Parameters Magnification
Auto Merge
Full Range
By Time/By Counts
Count Limit Particles
Repeat Times Times
SOP Update Date
Sheath Liquid Parameters Sheath Liquid
Testing Unit Status RPM Target rpm
RPM Range rpm
Particle Parameters BG Correction
Smoothing Filter
Edge Enhancing Level
Coef. A for Binarizing
Diameter Correction
Statistics Parameters Dilution Ratio
Smoothing
Miles-Lantuejoul Method
Density Correction
Limit Analysis Parameters Size Type
Size-DspAxis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size Lower % %
Size-DspAxis Max um
Size-DspAxis Min um
Shape Type
Shape-DspAxis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-DspAxis Max
Shape-DspAxis Min
IP Board Settings Minimum Pixel
Median Filter
Threshold Level Coef.[a]
Extended Analysis 1 Analysis Type
Size Type
Size-DspAxis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size Lower % %
Size-DspAxis Max um
Size-DspAxis Min um
Shape Type
Shape-DspAxis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-DspAxis Max
Shape-DspAxis Min
Polygon Limit Point
Size Type
Size-DspAxis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size Lower % %
Size-DspAxis Max um
Size-DspAxis Min um
Shape Type
Shape-DspAxis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-DspAxis Max
Shape-DspAxis Min
Polygon Limit Point
Groups Items Units
Size Type
Size-DspAxis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size Lower % %
Size-DspAxis Max um
Size-DspAxis Min um
Shape Type
Shape-DspAxis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-DspAxis Max
Shape-DspAxis Min
Polygon Limit Point
Size Type
Size-DspAxis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size Lower % %
Size-DspAxis Max um
Size-DspAxis Min um
Shape Type
Shape-DspAxis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-DspAxis Max
Shape-DspAxis Min
Polygon Limit Point
Groups Items Units
Supplementary explanation:
1. Testing Parameters
1) Magnification
You can select from three modes: HPF, LPF, and LPF -> HPF.
2) Auto Merge
If you select [Apply] and set repeat count up as more than 2 in Stop by Time, all measured
data will be merged automatically and new merged records will be generated after all repeat
measurement has been finished.
Size Type
Size-DspAxis Div
Size Upper Limit um
Size Lower Limit um
Size Upper % %
Size Lower % %
Size-DspAxis Max um
Size-DspAxis Min um
Shape Type
Shape-DspAxis Div
Shape Upper Limit
Shape Lower Limit
Shape Upper % %
Shape Lower % %
Shape-DspAxis Max
Shape-DspAxis Min
Polygon Limit Point
User definition Definition 1
Definition 2
Definition 3
Definition 4
Definition 5
Definition 6
Definition 7
Definition 8
Definition 9
Definition 10
Groups Items Units
3) Full Range
If you select [Analyze], records of full range will be generated after LPF/HPF measure if
you measured in full range mode. For details refer to Chapter 16, FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION.
4) By time/By count
You can select quantity count or total count.
5) Count Limit
When you select total count mode, you can set the number for reaching the target.
6) Repeat Times
When you select quantity count mode, you can set the number of measurement repetitions.
Up to 20 can be set.
7) SOP Update Date
You can view the day when SOP configuration information is updated (cannot be edited
here).
2. Sheath Liquid Parameters
1) Sheath Liquid
You can select the sheath liquid used for measurement.
You can select from particle sheath, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and ethylene glycol.
3. Testing Unit Status
1) RPM Target
You can set the target value for the mixing rpm of the sample mixer unit.
You can set from 50 to 750 rpm.
2) RPM Range
You can set the rpm monitoring range for the mixing rpm of the sample mixer unit.
If you input 100 rpm, the rotation rate is monitored 100 rpm of the mixer rpm target value.
4. Particle Parameters
1) BG Correction
Apply/Not Apply
You can set whether or not to use background compensation in the particle analysis
processing. The default is set to Apply.
2) Smoothing Filter
Median, Other 1, Other 2, Don't
You can select a smoothing filter for eliminating noise.
The default is set to Median.
3) Edge Enhancing Level
2D Filter, Other 1, Other 2, Don't
You can select the edge emphasis processing filter.
The default is set to 2D Filter.
4) Coefficient for Binarizing
You can set the threshold for binarization processing.
Coef. A for Binarizing (Default = 10)
5) Diameter Correction
Apply/Not Apply
You can select whether or not to correct the calculated particle diameter parameters and
circularity with the calibration results. The default is set to Apply.
5. Statistics Parameters
1) Dilution Ration
When the dilution ratio is set, the particle density is displayed converted to the pre-dilution
value.
You can input a real number up to a maximum of 99,999.
2) Smoothing
Apply/Not Apply
You can select whether or not to smooth the frequency distribution display.
The default is set to Not Apply.
3) Miles - Lantuejoul Method
Apply/Not Apply
You can select whether or not to use frame correction.
4) Density Correction
Apply/Not Apply
You can select whether or not to correct the particle concentrations with the calibration
results.
6. Limit Analysis Parameters
1) Size Type
2) Size-Dsp Axis Div
display axis.
3) Sizes Upper Limit
4) Size Lower Limit
5) Size Upper %
NOTE: In the dark field mode, binarization threshold of a particle image used in the particle
analysis is calculated with the following equation.
Binarization threshold = Most frequent brightness of background image + A
A: Threshold Level Coefficient
6) Size Lower %
7) Size-Dsp Axis Max
8) Size-Dsp Axis Min
9) Shape Type
10)Shape-Dsp Axis Div
11)Shape Upper Limit
12)Shape Lower Limit
13)Shape Upper %
14)Shape Lower %
15)Shape-Dsp Axis Max
distribution.
16)Shape-Dsp Axis Min
distribution.
7. Image Processing Board Settings
You can set the parameters for the image processing board mounted in the main unit.
1) Minimum Pixel
You can set the effective minimum number of pixel captured.
5/12/20/40/60/90/145/215/300/395/510/645/830/950/1050/1250 can be selected.
2) Median Filter
You can set whether or not to use the median filter for smoothing processing.
3) Threshold Level Coefficient
You can set the threshold for binarizing the captured image.
Threshold level coef. a (Default = 10)
NOTE: In the dark field mode, binarization threshold of a particle image used in particle analysis
is calculated with the following equation.
Binarization threshold = Most frequent brightness of background image + a
a: Threshold Level Coefficient
8. Extended Analysis 1-5
These items are valid for extending analyses that can be used on the [Analysis Results] screen.
This section explains extending analysis 1 as typical.
1) Analysis Type
Rectangular analysis/Polygonal analysis
You can select either rectangular analysis, which limits through normal discrimination
operations, or polygonal analysis, which limits by specifying points on the scattergram.
2) Size Upper Limit
This is only valid when the analysis type is rectangular.
3) Size Lower Limit
4) Shape Upper Limit
You can set the upper value for the Y-axis form.
5) Shape Lower Limit
You can set the lower value for the Y-axis form.
6) Polygon Limit Point
These show the polygonal limit points on the scattergram.
This is only valid when the analysis type is polygonal.
The limit points can only be changed on the [Analysis Results] screen.
9. User definition items
The user can mount user definitions by creating their own calculation equation using the
statistical results.
User defined equations 1-10 can be set.
The results of these calculations are stored into the results records.
Below is the method for creating a user-defined equation.
First, move the mouse to the value column for user-defined equation 1-10, then left click to
display the figure below.
Input the item name, calculation equation, and unit, then press the [Setting] button.
Figure J-25: [Setting Extended Analysis items] dialog
The creation method is shown below.
1) Item Name input
You can input the defined equation name. You can input alphanumeric.
2) Equation input
For variables, you can use the following two methods. (For the input characters, lowercase
and uppercase are not distinguished.)
Variables 1:
Variables that take the form (scatter).axis.(parameter)
Scatter: standard item and five extended analysis items
SS1, ES1, ES2, ES3, ES4, ES5
Meanings: SS1 (standard), ES1-ES5 (extended analyses)
Axis: X, Y
Parameters: 7 analysis items
MEAN, MODE, P50, LOWER, UPPER, SD, CV
Meanings: MEAN (average), MODE (mode value), P50 (50% value),
LOWER (lower value), UPPER (upper value), SD (SD), CV (CV)
(Concrete examples)
SS1.X.LOWER: On the standard analysis screen scattergram, of the items selected on the
X axis, this takes the Lower value data as the variable.
Variables 2:
Variables that take the form (scatter).A.(analysis results)
The scattergram is the same as above.
Analysis results: The results analyzed
D, SP, MP, LP, AP, TC, VC, SC
Meaning: D (Density: Particle density), SP (SmallParticle: Small
particle ratio),
MP (MiddleParticle: Middle particle ratio), LP
(LargeParticle: Large particle ratio),
AP (AreaParticle: Particle limit ratio), TC (TotalCounts:
Particle detection count),
VC (ValidCounts: Valid analysis count), SC
(SelectedParticle: Selected particle count)
(Concrete examples)
ES1.A.D: Takes the density of the expansion analysis rectangular analysis 1 screen as the
variable.
The functions that can be used are as follows.
Functions: LOG(), LOG10(), EXP(), EXP10(), SQRT()
3) Unit input
Input the unit in alphanumeric.
4) User-defined item example
These are examples of user-defined items.
Example 1: DATA1=LOG(ES2.A.D)
Example 2: DATA2=ES1.A.AP/ES2.AP
9. Maintenance
9.1 Quality Control
Maintain condition of the instrument by performing the quality control since the measurement
results are influenced by flash brightness in the dark field mode. If the condition is out of the quality
control range, "9.2 Adjustment of the flash brightness" should be performed.
For detail of the quality control, refer to Chapter 6. In the case of Dark Field Unit, display the
quality control dialog by selecting [Maintenance] - [Quality Control]. The Light field system
combo box in the right side of the dialog becomes valid for selecting dark field or bright field.
9.2 Adjustment of the flash brightness
Use PARTICLE SHEATH as sheath fluid.
Use the polystyrene latex particle of diameter 2m as a sample. (Refer to the following Flash
Brightness Adjustment Sample)
Be sure to perform the automatic focusing adjustment prior to the adjustment of the flash
brightness.
Adjust flash brightness to an optimized value automatically. Perform the following procedures
when the FPIA-3000 Dark Field Unit is being used.
1) Select and perform [Maintenance] - [Sequence] - [Adjustment of flash brightness(DF)].
After processing of the previous sequence is completed, the following dialog appears.
Figure J-26: [Adjustment of flash brightness Sequence] dialog
Dispense 5ml of the prepared flash brightness adjustment sample into the testing unit sample
chamber.
2) Press the [Start] button. Adjustment of flash brightness sequence proceeds.
Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample
For flash brightness adjustment sample for dark field, use the polystyrene latex particle of diameter
2m described in APPENDIX F, FOCUS ADJUSTING SAMPLE, and prepare it in the same
manner as for the focus adjusting sample.
Select [Settings] - [System Parameters]. The flash brightness adjustment sample information
(e.g. lot number) is shown in the displayed [Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample] field, so use the
particle of the same lot number. In the case of changing the particle lot, enter appropriate sample
information in the [Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample] field by referring to the following
description.
In the case of changing things as lot of flash brightness adjustment sample, enter and save the
sample information in the system parameters dialog as follows.
1 Perform automatic focus adjustment using the preset flash brightness adjustment sample, then
check the results for things as particle diameter and intensity mean.
2 Perform the measurement of the updated flash brightness adjustment sample.
3 Select [Settings] - [System Parameters] to open system parameters dialog. Move cursor to
the [Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample] field, and enter the type of the particle and lot
number.
Move cursor to the [Strobe Luminance DF] field, and enter the obtained intensity mean.
Up to 50 characters can be entered for each field.
Figure J-27: [System Parameters] dialog
Strobe Luminance
DF
Flash Brightness
Adjustment
Sample field
INDEX
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 Index-1
Index
A
Accessories .............................................. A-1
Adding a quality control file ....................... 6-3
Adjusting the -0.05 MPa Pressure .......... 14-5
Adjusting the pressure ............................ 14-1
Adjustment of rinse pressure .................. 14-4
Adjustment of the flash brightness ......... 15-8
Analysis conditions ................................... 4-8
Analysis data ........................................ 16-10
Analysis parameters ............................... 10-1
Auto Focusing ........................................... 3-9
Auto rinse ............................................... 15-1
Auto target ................................................ 6-6
B
Background Check .......................... 3-7, 15-4
Background Count Generated by Erosion
................................................................G-5
C
Change logon user ............................... 13-15
Change password ................................... 13-1
Changing hardware ...................................J-4
Changing the display of the Analysis Results
screen .................................................. 5-34
Changing the fuse in the pneumatic unit
............................................................ 15-10
Changing the fuse in the testing unit ...... 15-9
Changing the record display ................... 5-17
Check instrument status ........................... 4-2
Checking Light Field System ...................J-15
Checking the pressure of the testing unit
.............................................................. 14-2
Compressor ON ...................................... 15-8
Connecting the power cables and connection
cables .................................................. A-22
Connecting the tubes .............................. A-17
Cover open/close .................................... 15-8
CSV export ............................................. 5-55
D
Data format ............................................... D-7
Extend data ........................................ D-13
Histogram data ..................................... D-9
Scattergram data ............................... D-11
Test results (limited data) ..................... D-7
Deleting a quality control data .................. 6-7
Deleting a quality control file ..................... 6-5
Deletion ................................................... 5-16
Detail Results .......................................... 5-43
Detailed information display .................... 5-37
Dismantling the fastener for transportation
................................................................ A-8
Display of analysis results ...................... 4-14
Display of error history .............................. 7-3
Display reset ........................................... 5-13
Disposal .................................................. 2-17
E
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ....... 1-7
Emergency stop ........................................ 2-6
Error code list ............................................ 7-6
Error message (in alphabetical order) ...... 7-4
Error message list by function .................. 7-7
Error messages and troubleshooting ........ 7-9
Ethernet communications .........................D-5
Hardware ..............................................D-5
Software ...............................................D-5
Text format ...........................................D-6
Transmission format selection .............D-6
Explanation of labeling .............................. 1-1
Exterior dimensions .................................. A-7
F
File menu items ...................................... 5-45
File Settings .............................................. 6-2
Focus adjusting particle ............................ F-1
Form parameters .................................... 16-8
Frequency tables .................................... 5-38
G
Gas sensor level setting values ................ E-1
Graph (Overlay-View) ............................. 5-40
Graph (Trend-View) ................................ 5-44
Grounding ........................................2-8, A-25
I
Import ...................................................... 5-48
Installation location ................................... 2-7
Installation of Acrobat Reader ................ A-30
Installing and moving the instrument ........ 2-7
Installing the analysis PC ........................ A-26
Instrument inspection ................................ 3-1
INDEX
Index-2 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006
L
Lens Unit ...................................................H-1
List of FPIA-3000S recognized organic
solvents ..................................................E-2
Lockout ................................................. 13-14
M
Maintenance ........................................... J-28
Adjustment of the flash brightness ..... J-28
Flash Brightness Adjustment Sample
.......................................................... J-29
Quality Control .................................... J-28
Manual focusing ...................................... 15-2
Measurement condition settings ............... 4-6
Merging records ...................................... 5-16
Meta Data ............................................... 5-42
Mounting the Filter Assembly No. 24 (FPIA-
3000S) ..................................................A-15
Moving records ....................................... 5-20
Multi Scattergrams .................................. 5-39
N
Names and functions of the components of the
FPIA-3000/3000S ................................. 2-11
Front panel/right front panel ............... 2-11
Pneumatic unit .................................... 2-15
Rear side of the testing unit ................ 2-13
Names of components of the testing unit .. 2-3
New ......................................................... 5-46
O
Open ....................................................... 5-47
Other test data ........................................ 16-9
Overview of quality control ........................ 6-1
Overview of the device .............................. 2-1
P
Packaging ................................................. 2-7
Particle analysis ...................................... 16-3
Particle diameter parameters .................. 16-7
Particle form ............................................D-19
Particle image list .................................... 5-35
PDF Print ................................................ 5-53
Periodic Replacement Parts ................. 15-11
Place and space for installation ................A-5
Preparation of focus adjustment sample ... F-2
Preparing a sample ................................. 4-11
Pressure adjustment points .................... 14-3
Principle of Dark Field Test ....................... J-1
Print format ............................................. 12-1
Deletion ............................................ 12-24
Importing File ...................................... 12-2
New format creation and editing ......... 12-5
Preview ............................................. 12-25
Saving .............................................. 12-24
Saving Files - All Data ........................ 12-4
Saving Files - Selected Data .............. 12-4
Printer paper ............................................. 3-1
Printing .................................................... 5-52
Process executed after replacing the FPIA-
3000 Dark Field Unit ............................. J-15
Processing analysis results ..................... 5-18
Property .................................................. 12-8
Character (Label) ............................... 12-9
Cumulative frequency ....................... 12-22
Frequency Table .............................. 12-21
Graph (Overlay-View) ....................... 12-12
Graph (Overlay-View) Table ............. 12-15
Graph (Trend-View) .......................... 12-10
Line ..................................................... 12-8
Margin Settings ................................ 12-23
Particle Image .................................. 12-19
Picture .............................................. 12-11
Record List ....................................... 12-13
Results ............................................. 12-20
Scattergram ...................................... 12-14
Testing/Analysis Parameters ............ 12-16
X-Axis Histogram .............................. 12-17
Y-Axis Histogram .............................. 12-18
Q
Quality control ........................................... 6-1
R
Reagents ............................................ 2-8, 3-1
Reanalyze ...................................... 5-15, 5-22
Record Display and Processing ................ 5-1
Replacing the Sheath Fluid ..................... J-12
Resetting the alarm ................................... 7-1
Revert from error ..................................... 15-2
Reverting from an error ............................. 7-2
S
Sample information revision .................... 5-14
Sample information setting ....................... 4-4
Sample Temperature Arisen when Ultrasonic
Scanned ................................................ G-7
Save ........................................................ 5-50
Screen display of the data processing unit
................................................................ 2-4
INDEX
Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006 Index-3
Search functions ..................................... 5-11
Serial communications ............................. D-1
Class A communications ...................... D-2
Class B communications ...................... D-3
Communication Format ........................ D-1
Hardware ............................................. D-1
Monitoring the receiver (host) side ....... D-4
Processing of communication errors with
the host ............................................. D-4
Protocols used in communication with the
host ................................................... D-2
Signal Level ......................................... D-2
Setting Default Database ...................... 13-14
Setting instrument conditions ................... 4-9
Sheath fluid settings (Only for the FPIA-3000S)
................................................................ 9-5
Effects by sheath physical characteristics
........................................................... 9-5
Sheath fluid specific hardware settings
........................................................... 9-6
Sheath liquid exchange .......................... 15-5
Sheath liquid replacement ........................ 3-5
Shutting down (turning off the power) ..... 4-15
Signs ......................................................... 1-6
Software Conforming to Part 11 ................ I-1
SOP setting .............................................. 4-5
SOP settings .....................................8-1, J-18
Sort functions ............................................ 5-7
Specifications ........................................... B-1
Starting the analysis program ...........3-3, J-10
Statistical analysis .................................. 16-5
Statistical analysis items ......................... 16-9
Stir motor adjustment ............................. 15-8
System configuration ................................ 2-2
System setup ............................................ 9-1
Setting menu items .............................. 9-1
System settings .................................... 9-1
T
Table of SOP settings ............................... C-3
Table of system settings ........................... C-1
Target setting ............................................ 6-6
Test flow ................................................... 4-1
Testing a sample .................................... 4-12
Testing principles .................................... 16-1
The filter function ...................................... 5-9
Thumbnail image display ........................ 5-21
Transmission to the host ........................ 5-56
Turning on the device ............................... 3-2
Types of alarms ........................................ 2-6
U
Ultrasonic Dispersion Unit ........................G-1
User Registration .................................... 13-2
V
View settings ........................................... 11-1
View settings - Graph (Overlay-View) 11-9
View settings - Graph (Trend-View) ... 11-7
View settings - Record list .................. 11-2
View settings - Result (Graph) ........... 11-3
View settings - Result (List) ................ 11-6
INDEX
Index-4 Sysmex FPIA-3000/FPIA-3000S Operator's Manual -- Revised August 2006

FPIA3000 User Manual English August 2006

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FPIA3000 User Manual English August 2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Flow Particle Image Analyzer

2004-2006 by SYSMEX CORPORATION

FPIA-3000/3000S Flow Particle Image analyzer.

You might also like